DVC6000SIS

Introduction

Installation

375 Field Communicator Basics

Basic Setup

Detailed Setup

Calibration

Viewing Device Information

Principle of Operation

Maintenance

Parts

Loop Schematics/Nameplates

Glossary

Index

D10

3230

X01

2

DVC6000 SISInstruction Manual

Form 5807May 2007

DVC6000 Series FIELDVUE�

Digital Valve Controllers forSafety Instrumented System(SIS) Solutions

This manual applies to:

DVC6000 SIS Digital Valve Controllers Model 375 FieldCommunicator

Device Revision

FirmwareRevision

HardwareRevision

DeviceDescription

Revision

2 7 1 1

www.Fisher.com

GlossaryGlossaryGlossaryGlossaryGlossaryGlossaryGlossaryGlossary

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

Glossary

IndexIndex

DVC6000 SIS

ii

Fast-Key Sequence

Function/Variable Fast-KeySequence

Coord-inates(1) Function/Variable Fast-Key

SequenceCoord-

inates(1)

Actuator Style 1-2-6-4 4-D Drive Signal Alert Enable 1-2-3-1-2-1 10-C

Alert Conditions 2-1 2-E DVC Power Up 1-2-7-4 3-D

Alert Record Full Enable 1-2-3-7-2 8-F End Point Control Enable 1-2-2-2-2-1 6-C

Alert Record Not Empty Alert Enable 1-2-3-7-1 8-F Failure Group Enable 1-2-3-7-5-1 10-G

Analog Input 3-1 2-F Feedback Connection 1-2-6-5 4-D

Analog Input Calibration 1-3-2-3 4-E Firmware Revision 3-7-6 4-H

Analog Input Range Hi 1-2-5-3-1 6-H Flash ROM Shutdown 1-2-3-1-3-5 11-C

Analog Input Range Lo 1-2-5-3-2 6-H Hardware Revision 3-7-7 4-I

Analog Input Units 1-2-5-2-3 6-HHART Tag

1-2-5-1-1 6-F

Auto Test Interval 1-2-7-3 3-D 3-7-1 4-H

Auto Travel Calibration 1-3-1-1 4-E HART Universal Revision 3-7-9 4-I

Autocalibration in Progress Enable 1-2-4-2-2 8-H Input Characterization 1-2-2-3 4-C

Auxiliary Input3-6-1 5-G

Instrument Date and Time1-2-4-1-2 8-G

1-2-3-3-1-2 10-C 1-2-5-8 5-F

Auxiliary Terminal Alert Enable 1-2-3-3-1-1 10-C Instrument Level 3-7-8 4-I

Auxiliary Terminal Mode1-2-3-3-1-3 10-D

Instrument ModeHot Key-1 1-A

1-2-5-7 5-F 1-2-1-1 4-B

Burst Command 1-2-1-4-2 6-A Instrument Serial Number 1-2-5-1-6 6-F

Burst Enable 1-2-1-4-1 6-A Instrument Time Invalid Enable 1-2-4-1-1 8-G

Calibration in Progress Enab 1-2-4-2-1 8-GIntegral Dead Zone

1-2-4-4-4 8-I

Calibration Location 1-2-5-9-2 6-H 1-2-2-1-2-1 9-A

Clear Record 1-2-3-7-4 8-GIntegral Limit

1-2-4-4-3 8-I

Command 3 (Trending) Press 1-2-1-4-3 6-A 1-2-2-1-2-2 9-A

Control ModeHot Key-2 1-A Integrator Saturated Hi Enable 1-2-4-4-1 8-H

1-2-1-2 4-B Integrator Saturated Lo Enable 1-2-4-4-2 8-H

Critical NVM Shutdown 1-2-3-1-3-4 11-C Lag Time 1-2-2-5-3 6-D

Cycle Count1-2-3-5-1-2 5-F Last Calibration Status 1-2-5-9-1 6-H

3-6-5 3-H Manual Travel Calibration 1-3-1-2 4-E

Cycle Count Alert Enable 1-2-3-5-1-1 10-FManufacturer

3-7-3 4-H

Cycle Count Alert Point 1-2-3-5-1-3 10-F 1-2-6-1 4-D

Date 1-2-5-1-4 6-F Maximum Supply Pressure 1-2-5-6 5-F

Dead Band (Cycle Count / Travel Accum) 1-2-3-5-2-1 10-F Message 1-2-5-1-2 6-F

Define Custom Characteristic 1-2-2-4 4-C Miscellaneous Group Enable 1-2-3-7-5-3 10-G

Descriptor 1-2-5-1-3 6-F Model 3-7-4 4-H

Device Description Information 3-8 2-G Multi-Drop Alert Enable 1-2-4-3-2 8-H

Device ID 3-7-2 4-H No Free Time Shutdown 1-2-3-1-3-6 11-C

Device Revision 3-7-5 4-H Non-Critical NVM Alert Enable 1-2-3-1-3-3 11-B

Diagnostic Data Available Enable 1-2-4-2-4 8-HNumber of Power Ups

2-3-4 4-F

Diagnostic in Progress Enable 1-2-4-2-3 8-H 3-6-9 5-H

Display Record 1-2-3-7-3 8-F Offline/Failed Alert Enable 1-2-3-1-3-1 11-B

Drive Current Shutdown 1-2-3-1-1 9-C Partial Stroke Test 2-5 2-F

Drive Signal3-4 3-F Partial Stroke Test Enable 1-2-7-1 3-D

1-2-3-1-2-2 10-C Partial Stroke Test Pressure Limit 1-2-3-6-1 8-F

Partial Stroke Test Start Point 1-2-2-2-2-2 8-C

1. Coordinates are to help locate the item on the foldout menu tree.

continued on facing page

Unfold this sheet to see the 375 Field Communicator Menu Tree

DVC6000 SIS

ii ii

Online1 Configure / Setup2 Device Diagnostics3 Device Variables

Calibrate1 Travel Calibration2 Sensor Calibration3 Relay Adjust4 Restore Factory 4 Settings5 PST Calibration

Alerts1 Electronics Alerts2 Sensor Alerts3 Enviroment Alerts4 Travel Alerts5 Travel History Alerts6 SIS Alerts 7 Alert Record

Device Information1 HART Tag2 Device ID3 Manufacturer4 Model5 Device Rev6 Firmware Rev7 Hardware Rev8 Inst Level9 HART Univ Rev

Variables1 Aux Input2 Temperature3 Temp Max4 Temp Min5 Cycle Count6 Tvl Accum7 Raw Tvl Input8 Run Time9 Num of Power Ups

Configure / Setup1 Basic Setup2 Detailed Setup3 Calibrate

Instrument1 General2 Units3 Analog Input Range4 Relay Type5 Zero Pwr Cond6 Max Supply Press7 Aux Term Mode8 Inst Date and Time9 Calib Status and Loc

Basic Setup1 Setup Wizard2 Performance Tuner

Hot Key1 Instrument Mode2 Control Mode3 Protection4 Stabilize/Optimize

Field Communicator1 Offline2 Online3 Utility

Response Control1 Tuning2 Tvl/Press Control3 Input Char4 Define Custom Char5 Dynamic Response

Notes:

1-1-1 indicates fast-key sequence to reach menu

This menu is available by pressing the leftarrow key from the previous menu.

1-1

1

Valve & Actuator1 Manufacturer2 Valve Serial Num3 Valve Style4 Actuator Style5 Feedback Conn6 Tvl Sensor Motion

Tuning1 Travel Tuning2 Integral Settings3 Pressure Tuning

Travel Calibration1 AutoTvl Calib2 Man Tvl Calib

Pressures1 Pressure A2 Pressure B3 Pressure Diff4 Supply Press

1

Instrument Level SISModel 375 Field Communicator Menu Tree for FIELDVUE� DVC6000

Device Diagnostics1 Alert Conditions2 Status3 Device Record4 Stroke Valve5 Partial Stroke Test

Device Variables1 Analog In2 Tvl Set Pt3 Travel4 Drive Signal5 Pressures6 Variables7 Device Information8 DD Information

Detailed Setup1 Mode and Protection2 Response Control3 Alerts4 Status5 Instrument6 Valve & Actuator7 SIS/Partial Stroke

1

Sensor Calibration1 Press Sensors2 Tvl Sensor Adjust3 Analog In Calib

1-2-1

1-2

Tvl/Press Control1 Tvl/Press Cutoffs2 End Pt Press Control

Dynamic Response1 SP Rate Open2 SP Rate Close3 Lag Time

1-2-4

1-2-5

1-2-6

1-3

1-3-1

1-3-2

3

2

3-5

3-6

1 2 3 4 5 6

Device Record1 Temp Max2 Temp Min3 Run Time4 Num of Power Ups

2-3

SIS/Partial Stroke1 PST Enable2 PST Vars View/Edit3 Auto Test Interval4 DVC Power Up

1-2-7

Status1 Instrument Time2 Calibrations and Diagnostics3 Operational4 Integrator

1-2-3

Units1 Pressure Units2 Temp Units3 Analog In Units

Analog Input Range1 Input Range Hi2 Input Range Lo

3-7

1-2-2

1-2-5-2

1-2-5-3

1-2-2-1

1-2-2-2

1-2-2-5

Calib Status and Loc1 Last Calib Status2 Calib Loc

1-2-5-9

General1 HART Tag2 Message3 Descriptor4 Date5 Valve Serial Num6 Inst Serial Num7 Polling Address

1-2-5-1

Mode and Protection1 Instrument Mode2 Control Mode3 Restart Ctrl Mode4 Burst Mode5 Protection

Burst Mode1 Burst Enable2 Burst Command3 Cmd 3(Trending)Press

1-2-1-4

DVC6000 SIS

iiiiii

Menu Tree for for Model 375 Field Communicator Device Description Revision 1

7 8 9 10 11

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

12

Electronics Alerts1 Drive Current Shutdown2 Drive Signal Alert3 Processor Impaired Alerts

Travel Tuning1 Tvl Tuning Set2 Tvl Integ Enable3 Tvl Integ Gain4 Stabilize / Optimize5 Peformance Tuner Integral Settings

1 Integ DeadZ2 Integ LimitPressure Tuning

1 Press Tuning Set2 Press Integ Enab3 Press Integ Gain

Tvl/Press Cutoffs1 Tvl/Press Cut Hi2 Tvl/Press Cut Lo

Drive Signal Alert1 Drive Signal Alrt Enab2 Drive Signal

Processor Impaired Alerts1 Offline/Failed Alrt Enab2 Power Starvation Alrt Enab3 Non-Critical NVM Alrt Enab4 Critical NVM Shutdown5 Flash ROM Shutdown6 No Free Time Shutdown7 Reference Voltage Shutdown

Sensor Alerts1 Tvl Sensor Shutdown2 Temp Sensor Shutdown3 Press Sensor Shutdown

Enviroment Alerts1 Aux Terminal Alrt2 Supply Press Lo Alrt

Travel Limit Alerts1 Tvl Alrt Hi Hi Enab2 Tvl Alrt Lo Lo Enab3 Tvl Alrt Hi Hi Pt4 Tvl Alrt Lo Lo PtTravel Alerts

1 Travel2 Tvl Set Pt3 Tvl Alrt DB4 Travel Deviation Alert5 Travel Limit Alerts6 Travel Limit Hi/Lo Alerts7 Trave Limit / Cutoff Alerts

Travel History Alerts1 Cycle Count2 Cycle Count/Tvl Accum Deadband3 Tvl Accum

Travel Limit Hi/Lo Alerts1 Tvl Alrt Hi Enab2 Tvl Alrt Lo Enab3 Tvl Alrt Hi Pt4 Tvl Alrt Lo Pt

Travel Limit / Cutoff Alerts1 Tvl Limit/Cutoff Hi Alrt Enab2 Tvl Limit/Cutoff Lo Alrt Enab3 Tvl/Press Cut Hi4 Tvl/Press Cut Lo

Integrator1 Integrator Sat Hi Enab2 Integrator Sat Lo Enab3 Integ Limit4 Integ DeadZ

Travel Deviation Alert1 Tvl Dev Alrt Enab2 Tvl Dev Alrt Pt3 Tvl Dev Time

Tvl Accum1 Tvl Accum Alrt Enab2 Tvl Accum3 Tvl Accum Alrt Pt

Cycle Count1 Cycle Count Alrt Enab2 Cycle Count3 Cycle Count Alrt Pt

Instrument Time1 Inst Time Invalid Enab2 Inst Date and Time

Calibrations and Diagnostics1 Cal in Progress Enab2 Autocal in Progress Enab3 Diag in Progress Enab4 Diag Data Avail Enab

Operational1 Press Ctrl Active Enab2 Multi-Drop Enab

1-2-2-1-1

1-2-2-2-1

1-2-3-1

1-2-3-1-2

1-2-3-1-3

End Pt Press Control1 End Pt Control Enab2 PST Start Pt3 Press Set Pt4 Press Sat Time

1-2-2-2-2

SIS Alerts1 PST Press Limit2 Press Dev Alrt Enab3 Press Dev Alrt Pt4 Press Dev Time

Supply Press Lo Alrt1 Supply Press Lo Alrt Enab2 Supply Press3 Supply Press Lo Alrt Pt

Aux Terminal Alrt1 Aux Terminal Alrt Enab2 Aux Input3 Aux Term Mode

1-2-3-3-1

Alert Record1 Alrt Record Not Empty Enab2 Alrt Record Full Enab3 Display Record4 Clear Record5 Alert Groups

Alert Groups1 Failure Group Enab2 Valve Group Enab3 Misc Group Enab

Tvl Tuning Set1 Tvl Tuning Set2 Tvl Prop Gain3 Tvl Velocity Gain4 Tvl MLFB Gain

Press Tuning Set1 Press Tuning Set2 Press Prop Gain3 Press MLFB Gain

1 Dead Band

1-2-3-4

1-2-3-6

1-2-3-2

1-2-3-3

1-2-3-5

1-2-3-7

1-2-2-1-2

1-2-2-1-1-1

1-2-2-1-3 1-2-2-1-3-1

1-2-3-3-2

1-2-3-5-1

1-2-3-5-2

1-2-3-5-3

1-2-3-7-5

1-2-3-4-4

1-2-3-4-5

1-2-3-4-6

1-2-3-4-7

1-2-4-1

1-2-4-2

1-2-4-3

1-2-4-4

DVC6000 SIS

vv

Fast-Key Sequence (continued)

Function/Variable Fast-KeySequence

Coord-inates(1) Function/Variable Fast-Key

SequenceCoord-

inates(1)

Partial Stroke Test Variables View/Edit 1-2-7-2 3-DTemperature Maximum

3-6-3 5-G

Performance Tuner1-1-2 2-B 2-3-1 4-F

1-2-2-1-1-5 8-ATemperature Minimum

3-6-4 5-H

Polling Address 1-2-5-1-7 6-F 2-3-2 4-F

Power Starvation Alert Enable 1-2-3-1-3-2 11-B Temperature Sensor Shutdown 1-2-3-2-2 9-D

Pressure A 3-5-1 4-G Temperature Units 1-2-5-2-2 6-G

Pressure B 3-5-2 4-GTravel

3-3 2-F

Pressure Deviation Alert Enable 1-2-3-6-2 8-F 1-2-3-4-1 10-D

Pressure Deviation Alert Point 1-2-3-6-3 8-FTravel / Pressure Cutoff Hi

1-2-3-4-7-3 12-F

Pressure Deviation Time 1-2-3-6-4 8-F 1-2-2-2-1-1 9-B

Pressure Differential 3-5-3 4-GTravel / Pressure Cutoff Lo

1-2-3-4-7-4 12-F

Pressure Integral Control Enable 1-2-2-1-3-2 8-B 1-2-2-2-1-2 9-B

Pressure Integral Gain 1-2-2-1-3-3 8-BTravel Accumulator

3-6-6 6-H

Pressure MLFB Gain 1-2-2-1-3-1-3 10-B 1-2-3-5-3-2 10-F

Pressure Proportional Gain 1-2-2-1-3-1-2 10-B Travel Accumulator Alert Enable 1-2-3-5-3-1 10-F

Pressure Saturation Time 1-2-2-2-2-4 8-C Travel Accumulator Alert Point 1-2-3-5-3-3 10-F

Pressure Sensor Shutdown 1-2-3-2-3 9-D Travel Alert Dead Band 1-2-3-4-3 10-E

Pressure Sensors�Calibration 1-3-2-1 4-E Travel Alert Hi Enable 1-2-3-4-6-1 10-E

Pressure Set Point 1-2-2-2-2-3 8-C Travel Alert Hi Hi Enable 1-2-3-4-5-1 12-D

Pressure Tuning Set 1-2-2-1-3-1-1 10-B Travel Alert Hi Hi Point 1-2-3-4-5-3 12-D

Pressure Units 1-2-5-2-1 6-G Travel Alert Hi Point 1-2-3-4-6-3 12-E

ProtectionHot Key-3 1-A Travel Alert Lo Enable 1-2-3-4-6-2 12-E

1-2-1-5 4-B Travel Alert Lo Lo Enable 1-2-3-4-5-2 12-D

PST Calibration 1-3-5 3-E Travel Alert Lo Lo Point 1-2-3-4-5-4 12-D

Raw Travel Input 3-6-7 5-H Travel Alert Lo Point 1-2-3-4-6-4 12-E

Reference Voltage Shutdown 1-2-3-1-3-7 11-C Travel Deviation Alert Enable 1-2-3-4-4-1 12-D

Relay Adjust 1-3-3 3-E Travel Deviation Alert Point 1-2-3-4-4-2 12-D

Relay Type 1-2-5-4 5-F Travel Deviation Time 1-2-3-4-4-3 12-D

Restart Control Mode 1-2-1-3 4-B Travel Integral Control Enable 1-2-2-1-1-2 8-A

Restore Factory Settings 1-3-4 3-E Travel Integral Gain 1-2-2-1-1-3 8-A

Run Time2-3-3 4-F Travel Limit / Cutoff Hi Alert Enable 1-2-3-4-7-1 12-E

3-6-8 5-H Travel Limit / Cutoff Lo Alert Enable 1-2-3-4-7-2 12-E

Set Point Rate Close 1-2-2-5-2 6-C Travel MLFB Gain 1-2-2-1-1-1-4 10-A

Set Point Rate Open 1-2-2-5-1 6-C Travel Proportional Gain 1-2-2-1-1-1-2 10-A

Setup Wizard 1-1-1 2-B Travel Sensor Adjust 1-3-2-2 4-E

Stabilize/OptimizeHot Key-4 1-A Travel Sensor Motion 1-2-6-6 4-D

1-2-2-1-1-4 8-A Travel Sensor Shutdown 1-2-3-2-1 9-D

Status 2-2 2-FTravel Set Point

1-2-3-4-2 10-E

Stroke Valve 2-4 2-F 3-2 2-F

Supply Pressure3-5-4 4-G Travel Tuning Set 1-2-2-1-1-1-1 10-A

1-2-3-3-2-2 10-D Travel Velocity Gain 1-2-2-1-1-1-3 10-A

Supply Pressure Lo Alert Enable 1-2-3-3-2-1 10-D Valve Group Enable 1-2-3-7-5-2 10-G

Supply Pressure Lo Alert Point 1-2-3-3-2-3 10-DValve Serial Number

1-2-5-1-5 6-F

Temperature 3-6-2 5-G 1-2-6-2 4-D

Valve Style 1-2-6-3 4-D

Zero Power Condition 1-2-5-5 5-F1. Coordinates are to help locate the item on the foldout menu tree.

DVC6000 SIS

vi vi

DVC6000 Series FIELDVUE� Digital Valve Controller

THE FIELDVUE� DVC6000 SERIES DIGITAL VALVE CONTROLLER IS A CORE COMPONENT OF THEPLANTWEB� DIGITAL PLANT ARCHITECTURE. THE DIGITAL VALVE CONTROLLER POWERS PLANTWEBBY CAPTURING AND DELIVERING VALVE DIAGNOSTIC DATA. COUPLED WITH AMS� VALVELINK�

SOFTWARE, THE DVC6000 PROVIDES USERS WITH AN ACCURATE PICTURE OF VALVE PERFORMANCE,INCLUDING ACTUAL STEM POSITION, INSTRUMENT INPUT SIGNAL AND PNEUMATIC PRESSURE TOTHE ACTUATOR. USING THIS INFORMATION, THE DIGITAL VALVE CONTROLLER DIAGNOSES NOT ONLYITSELF, BUT ALSO THE VALVE AND ACTUATOR TO WHICH IT IS MOUNTED.

Introduction

May 2007 1-1

1-1

Section 1 Introduction

Scope of Manual 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Conventions Used in this Manual 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Description 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Specifications 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Related Documents 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Educational Services 1-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

DVC6000 SIS

May 20071-2

Table 1-1. DVC6000 SIS Tier CapabilitiesAuto Calibration

Custom Characterization

Alerts

Step Response, Drive Signal Test & Dynamic Error Band

Advanced Diagnostics (Valve Signature)

Performance Tuner

Performance Diagnostics(1)

Solenoid Valve Health Monitoring(1)

Partial Stroke Testing1. Available in Firmware Revision 7 and higher.

Scope of ManualThis instruction manual includes specifications,installation, operation, and maintenance informationfor FIELDVUE� DVC6000 Series digital valvecontrollers for Safety Instrumented System (SIS)Solutions.

This instruction manual describes using the Model 375Field Communicator with device description revision 1,used with DVC6000 device revision 2, firmwarerevision 7, to setup and calibrate the instrument. Youcan also use AMS� ValveLink� Software version 7.3or higher to setup, calibrate, and diagnose the valveand instrument. For information on using AMSValveLink Software with the instrument, refer to theAMS ValveLink Software help or documentation.

Do not install, operate, or maintain a DVC6000 digitalvalve controller without first � being fully trained andqualified in valve, actuator, and accessory installation,operation and maintenance, and � carefully readingand understanding the contents of this manual. If youhave any questions concerning these instructions,contact your Emerson Process Management� salesoffice before proceeding.

NoteNeither Emerson, Emerson ProcessManagement, nor any of their affiliatedentities assumes responsibility for theselection, use, and maintenance of anyproduct. Responsibility for theselection, use, and maintenance of anyproduct remains with the purchaserand end-user.

Figure 1-1. FIELDVUE� Type DVC6030 Digital Valve Controllerin SIS Solution Mounted on a Quarter-Turn Actuator

W8308-3 SIS

Conventions Used in this Manual

Procedures that require the use of the Model 375Field Communicator have the Field Communicatorsymbol in the heading.

Procedures that are accessible with the Hot Keyon the Field Communicator will also have the Hot Keysymbol in the heading.

Some of the procedures also contain the sequence ofnumeric keys required to display the desired FieldCommunicator menu. For example, to access theBasic Setup menu, from the Online menu, press 2(selects Configure / Setup) followed by a 1 (selectsBasic Setup) followed by a second 1 (selects SetupWizard). The key sequence in the procedure headingis shown as (2-1-1). The path required to accomplishvarious tasks, the sequence of steps through the FieldCommunicator menus, is also presented in textualformat. Menu selections are shown in italics, e.g.,Calibrate. An overview of the Model 375 FieldCommunicator menu structures are shown at thebeginning of this manual.

1

Introduction

May 2007 1-3

Description DVC6000 Series digital valve controllers (figure 1-1)are communicating, microprocessor-basedcurrent-to-pneumatic instruments. In addition to thenormal function of converting an input current signal toa pneumatic output pressure, the DVC6000 Seriesdigital valve controller, using the HART�

communications protocol, gives easy access toinformation critical to process operation. You can gaininformation from the principal component of theprocess, the control valve itself, using the FieldCommunicator at the valve or at a field junction box, orby using a personal computer or operator�s consolewithin the control room.

Using DVC6000 Series instruments for SIS solutionspermits partial stroking of the valve to minimize thechance of valve failure upon a safety demand and,consequently, the possibility of catastrophic situations.A partial stroke test verifies valve movement with asmall ramp to the input. This ramp is small enough notto disrupt production, but is large enough to confirmthat the valve is working. DVC6000 Series instrumentsalso provide state-of-the-art testing methods, whichreduce testing and maintenance time, improve systemperformance, and provide diagnostic capabilities.

Using a personal computer and AMS ValveLinkSoftware, AMS Suite: Intelligent Device Manager, or aModel 375 Field Communicator, you can performseveral operations with the DVC6000 Series digitalvalve controller. You can obtain general informationconcerning software revision level, messages, tag,descriptor, and date. Diagnostic information isavailable to aid you when troubleshooting. Input andoutput configuration parameters can be set, and thedigital valve controller can be calibrated. Refer to table1-1 for details on the capabilities of the SIS tier.

Using the HART protocol, information from the fieldcan be integrated into control systems or be receivedon a single loop basis.

TÜV Certification

TÜV has certified that valve-mounted DVC6000 Seriesdigital valve controller hardware, when operating in aSafety Instrumented System with a 0 to 24 volt DC or0 to 20 mA DC control signal, meets the requirementsof IEC 61508, and can be incorporated into SafetyInstrumented Function (SIF) loops that are rated toSafety Integrity Level 3 (SIL3).

Specifications

WARNING

Refer to table 1-2 for applicationspecifications. Incorrect configurationof a positioning instrument couldresult in the malfunction of theproduct, property damage or personalinjury.

Specifications for the DVC6000 Series digital valvecontrollers are shown in table 1-2. Specifications forthe Field Communicator can be found in the productmanual for the Field Communicator.

Related Documents Other documents containing information related toDVC6000 Series digital valve controllers for safetyinstrumented systems include:

� FIELDVUE� DVC6000 Series Digital Valve

Controllers for Safety Instrumented System (SIS)Solutions (Bulletin 62.1:DVC6000 SIS)

� Safety Manual for DVC6000 Series FIELDVUE�

Digital Valve Controllers for Safety InstrumentedSystem (SIS) Solutions − Form 5743

� Supplement to DVC6000 Series FIELDVUE�

Digital Valve Controllers for Safety InstrumentedSystem (SIS) Solutions Instruction Manual, PartialStroke Test − Form 5825

� Type LCP100 Local Control Panel InstructionManual − Form 5823

� FIELDVUE� Type LC340 Line ConditionerInstruction Manual − Form 5719

� Type 2530H1 HART� Interchange MultiplexerInstruction Manual - Form 5407

� AMS� ValveLink� Software Help orDocumentation

All documents are available from your EmersonProcess Management sales office. Also visit ourwebsite at www.FIELDVUE.com.

1

DVC6000 SIS

May 20071-4

Table 1-2. Specifications

Available Configurations

Valve-Mounted InstrumentsType DVC6010: Sliding stem applicationsType DVC6020: Rotary and long-strokesliding-stem applications [over 102 mm (4-inch)travel]Type DVC6030: Quarter-turn rotary applications

All units can be used in either 4-wire or 2-wiresystem installations.

DVC6000 Series digital valve controllers must havethe Safety Instrumented System Application (SIS)option

DVC6000 Series digital valve controllers can bemounted on Fisher� and other manufacturers rotaryand sliding-stem actuators.

Input Signal

Point-to-Point:Analog Input Signal: 4 to 20 mA DC, nominal; splitranging availableMinimum voltage available at instrument terminalsmust be 10.5 VDC for analog control, 11 VDC forHART communicationMinimum Control Current: 4.0 mAMinimum Current w/o Microprocessor Restart: 3.5mAMaximum Voltage: 30 VDCOvercurrent Protection: Input circuitry limits currentto prevent internal damage.Reverse Polarity Protection: No damage occursfrom reversal of loop current.Multi-drop:Instrument Power: 11 to 30 VDC at approximately8 mAReverse Polarity Protection: No damage occursfrom reversal of loop current.

Output Signal(1)

Pneumatic signal as required by the actuator, up to95% of full supply pressure.Minimum Span: 0.4 bar (6 psig)Maximum Span: 9.5 bar (140 psig)Action: Double, Single direct, and Single reverse

Supply Pressure(1,2)

Recommended: 1.7 bar (25 psi) or 0.3 bar (5 psi)plus the maximum actuator requirements,whichever is higherMaximum: 10 bar (145 psig) or maximum pressurerating of the actuator, whichever is lower

Steady-State Air Consumption(3,4)

Low Bleed RelayAt 1.4 bar (20 psig) supply pressure: Average value0.056 normal m3/hr (2.1 scfh)At 5.5 bar (80 psig) supply pressure: Average value0.184 normal m3/hr (6.9 scfh)

The low bleed relay is the standard relay forDVC6000 SIS tier, used for On/Off applications.Performance may be affected in throttlingapplications.

Maximum Output Capacity(3,4)

At 1.4 bar (20 psig) supply pressure: 10.0 normalm3/hr (375 scfh)

At 5.5 bar (80 psig) supply pressure: 29.5 normalm3/hr (1100 scfh)

Independent Linearity(1,5)

±0.50% of output span

Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)

Tested per IEC 61326-1 (Edition 1.1). Complieswith European EMC Directive. Meets emissionlevels for Class A equipment (industrial locations)and Class B equipment (domestic locations). Meetsimmunity requirements for industrial locations(Table A.1 in the IEC specification document).Immunity performance is shown in table 1-3.

Operating Ambient Temperature Limits(2)

−40 to 80�C (−40 to 176�F) for most approvedvalve-mounted instruments

Humidity Limits

0 to 100% condensing relative humidity

Electrical Classification

Hazardous Area:

Explosion proof, Division 2,Dust-Ignition proof, Intrinsic Safety

APPROVED

Explosion proof, Non-incendive,Dust-Ignition proof, Intrinsic Safety

ATEX Flameproof, Type n, Intrinsic Safety

IECEx Flameproof, Type n, Intrinsic Safety

Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety

−continued−

1

Introduction

May 2007 1-5

Table 1-2. Specifications (continued)

Hazardous Area (continued):

Refer to Special Instructions for Safe Use andInstallation in Hazardous Locations in Section 2,tables 1-4, 1-5, 1-6, 1-7, and 1-8 and figures 11-1,11-2, 11-3, 11-4, 11-5, 11-6, 11-7, 11-8, and 11-9for specific approval information.

Pollution Degree 2, Overvoltage Category III perANSI/ISA-82.02.01 (IEC 61010-1 Mod).

Electrical Housing: Meets NEMA 4X, CSA Type 4X,IEC 60529 IP66

Auxiliary Terminal Contact: Nominal ElectricalRating 3V, <1 mA; It is recommended that theswitch be sealed or have gold plated contacts toavoid corrosion.

For proper operation of the auxiliary input terminalcapacitance should not exceed 18000pF.

IEC 61010 Compliance Requirements(Valve-Mounted Instruments only)

Power Source: The loop current must be derivedfrom a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) powersource.Environmental Conditions: Installation Category I

Connections

Supply Pressure: 1/4 NPT internal and integralpad for mounting 67CFR regulatorOutput Pressure: 1/4 NPT internalTubing: 3/8-inch metal, recommendedVent: 3/8 NPT internalElectrical: 1/2 NPT internal conduit connection

Stem Travel

DVC6010: 0 to 102 mm (4-inches) maximum travelspan0 to 9.5 mm (0.375 inches) minimum travel span

DVC6020: 0 to 606 mm (23.875 inches) maximumtravel span

Shaft Rotation (DVC6020 and DVC6030)

0 to 50 degrees minimum0 to 90 degrees maximum

Mounting

Designed for direct actuator mounting or remotepipestand or wall mounting. Mounting theinstrument vertically, with the vent at the bottom ofthe assembly, or horizontally, with the vent pointingdown, is recommended to allow drainage ofmoisture that may be introduced via the instrumentair supply.

Weight

Valve-Mounted InstrumentsAluminum: 3.5 kg (7.7 lbs)Stainless Steel(6): 7.7 kg (17 lbs)

Options

� Supply and output pressure gauges or � Tirevalves, � Integral mounted filter regulator,� Stainless steel housing, module base, andterminal box(6), � Beacon Indicator, � LCP100local control panel

Declaration of SEP

Fisher Controls International LLC declares thisproduct to be in compliance with Article 3 paragraph3 of the Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) 97 /23 / EC. It was designed and manufactured inaccordance with Sound Engineering Practice (SEP)and cannot bear the CE marking related to PEDcompliance.

However, the product may bear the CE marking toindicate compliance with other applicable ECDirectives.

1. Defined in ISA Standard S51.1.2. The pressure/temperature limits in this document and any applicable code or standard should not be exceeded.3. Values at 1.4 bar (20 psig) based on a single-acting direct relay; values at 5.5 bar (80 psig) based on double-acting relay.4. Normal m3/hour − Normal cubic meters per hour at 0�C and 1.01325 bar, absolute. Scfh − Standard cubic feet per hour at 60�F and 14.7 psia5. Typical value. Not applicable for travels less than 19 mm (0.75 inch) or for shaft rotation less than 60 degrees. Also, not applicable to DVC6020 digital valve controllers in long-strokeapplications.6. The stainless steel option is available for Safety Instrumented Systems, however, TÜV approval is still in progress. Contact your Emerson Process Management sales office for additionalinformation.

1

DVC6000 SIS

May 20071-6

Table 1-3. Immunity Performance

Port Phenomenon Basic StandardPerformance Criteria(1)

Point-to-PointMode

Multi-drop Mode

Enclosure

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2 A(2) A

Radiated EM field IEC 61000-4-3 A A

Rated power frequency magnetic field IEC 61000-4-8 A A

I/O signal/control

Burst IEC 61000-4-4 A(2) A

Surge IEC 61000-4-5 A(2) A

Conducted RF IEC 61000-4-6 A A1. A = No degradation during testing. B = Temporary degradation during testing, but is self-recovering.2. Excluding auxiliary switch function, which meets Performance Criteria B.

Table 1-4. Type DVC6000 Series, Hazardous Area Classifications�Canada (CSA)Certification

BodyType Certification Obtained Entity Rating Temperature Code Enclosure

Rating

CSADVC60x0DVC60x0S(x = 1,2,3)

(Intrinsic Safety)Class/DivisionClass I,II,III Division 1 GP A,B,C,D,E,F,G per drawing 29B3428

Vmax = 30 VDCImax = 226 mACi = 5 nFLi = 0.55 mH

T5(Tamb � 80�C) 4X

(Explosion Proof)Class/DivisionClass I Division 1 GP B,C,D

− − −T6(Tamb � 80�C) 4X

Class I Division 2 GP A,B,C,DClass II Division 1 GP E,F,GClass III Division 1

− − −T6(Tamb � 80�C) 4X

Table 1-5. Type DVC6000 Series, Hazardous Area Classifications�United States (FM)Certification

BodyType Certification Obtained Entity Rating Temperature Code Enclosure

Rating

FMDVC60x0DVC60x0S(x = 1,2,3)

(Intrinsic Safety)Class/DivisionClass I,II,III Division 1 GP A,B,C,D,E,F,G per drawing 29B3427

Vmax = 30 VDCImax = 226 mACi = 5 nFLi = 0.55 mHPi = 1.4 W

T5(Tamb � 80�C) 4X

(Explosion Proof)Class/DivisionClass I Division 1 GP B,C,D

− − −T6(Tamb � 80�C) 4X

Class I Division 2 GP A,B,C,DClass II,III Division 1 GP E,F,GClass II,III Division 2 GP F,G

− − −T6(Tamb � 80�C) 4X

Table 1-6. Hazardous Area Classifications�ATEX

Certificate Type Certification Obtained Entity Rating Temperature Code EnclosureRating

ATEXDVC60x0DVC60x0S(x = 1,2,3)

II 1 G DGasEEx ia IIC T5/T6�Intrinsic SafetyDustT85�C (Tamb � 80�C)

Ui = 30 VDCIi = 226 mACi = 5 nFLi = 0.55 mHPi = 1.4 W

T5(Tamb � 80�C)T6 (Tamb �75�C)

IP66

II 2 G DGasEEx d IIB+H2 T5/T6 �FlameproofDustT90�C (Tamb � 85�C)

− − −

T5(Tamb � 85�C)T6 (Tamb � 75�C)

IP66

II 3 G DGasEEx nCL IIC T5/T6 �Type nDustT85�C (Tamb � 80�C)

− − −

T5(Tamb � 80�C)T6 (Tamb � 75�C)

IP66

1

Introduction

May 2007 1-7

Table 1-7. Hazardous Area Classifications�IECEx


IECExDVC60x0DVC60x0S(x = 1,2,3)

GasEx ia IIC T5/T6 �Intrinsic Safety

Ui = 30 VDCIi = 226 mACi = 5 nFLi = 0.55 mHPi = 1.4 W

T5(Tamb � 80�C)T6 (Tamb � 75�C)

IP66

GasEx d IIB+H2 T5/T6 �Flameproof − − −

T5(Tamb � 80�C)T6 (Tamb � 75�C)

IP66

GasEx nC IIC T5/T6 �Type n

− − −T5(Tamb � 80�C)T6 (Tamb � 75�C)

IP66

Table 1-8. Hazardous Area Classifications�NEPSI


NEPSI DVC60x0(x = 1,2,3)

GasEx ia IIC T5/T6 �Intrinsic SafetyDustDIP A21 T5

Ui = 30 VIi = 226 mACi = 5 nFLi = 0.55 mHPi = 1.4 W

T5(Tamb � 80�C)T6 (Tamb � 75�C)

IP66

GasEx d IIC T5/T6(1) �FlameproofDustDIP A21 T5

− − −

T5(Tamb � 80�C)T6 (Tamb � 75�C)

IP66

1. Except acetylene.

Educational Services For information on available courses for the DVC6000Series digital valve controller, as well as a variety ofother products, contact:Emerson Process ManagementEducational Services, RegistrationP.O. Box 190; 301 S. 1st Ave.Marshalltown, IA 50158−2823Phone: 800−338−8158 orPhone: 641−754−3771 FAX: 641−754−3431e-mail: [email protected]

1

DVC6000 SIS

May 20071-8

1

Installation

May 2007 2-1

2-2

Section 2 Installation

Special Instructions for Safe Use and Installations in Hazardous Areas

CSA 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FM 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ATEX Intrinsic Safety, Dust 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ATEX Flameproof, Dust 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ATEX Type n, Dust 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

IECEx, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Flameproof 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NEPSI, Intrinsic Safety, Dust and Flameproof, Dust 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mounting

Type DVC6010 on Sliding-Stem Actuators (up to 4 inches travel) 2-5. . . . . . . . . .

Type DVC6020 on Long-Stroke Sliding-Stem Actuators (4 to 24 inches travel) and Rotary Actuators 2-7. . . . . . .

Type DVC6030 on Quarter-Turn Actuators 2-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

67CFR Filter RegulatorIntegral-Mounted Regulator 2-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yoke-Mounted Regulator 2-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Casing-Mounted Regulator 2-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pneumatic Connections

Supply Connections 2-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Output Connections 2-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single-Acting Actuators 2-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double-Acting Actuators 2-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vent 2-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electrical Connections

4 to 20 mA Loop Connections 2-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Connections 2-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Communication Connections 2-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wiring Practices

Logic Solver or Control System Requirements 2-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage Available 2-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

DVC6000 SIS

May 20072-2

Compliance Voltage 2-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Maximum Cable Capacitance 2-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation in a Safety Instrumented System 2-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation in a 4-Wire System 2-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation in a 2-Wire System 2-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LCP100 (Local Control Panel) Installation 2-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Installation

May 2007 2-3

Installation

WARNING

Avoid personal injury or propertydamage from sudden release ofprocess pressure or bursting of parts.Before proceeding with anyInstallation procedures:

� Always wear protective clothing,gloves, and eyewear to preventpersonal injury.

� Disconnect any operating linesproviding air pressure, electric power,or a control signal to the actuator. Besure the actuator cannot suddenlyopen or close the valve.

� Use bypass valves or completelyshut off the process to isolate thevalve from process pressure. Relieveprocess pressure from both sides ofthe valve.

� Vent the pneumatic actuatorloading pressure and relieve anyactuator spring precompression.

� Use lock-out procedures to besure that the above measures stay ineffect while you work on theequipment.

� Check with your process orsafety engineer for any additionalmeasures that must be taken toprotect against process media.

WARNING

To avoid static discharge from theplastic cover, do not rub or clean thecover with solvents. To do so couldresult in an explosion. Clean with amild detergent and water only.

Special Instructions for Safe Use andInstallations in Hazardous LocationsCertain nameplates may carry more than oneapproval, and each approval may have uniqueinstallation requirements and/or conditions of safe use.Special instructions are listed by agency/approval.

After reading and understanding these specialconditions of use, proceed with mounting procedures.

WARNING

Failure to follow these conditions ofsafe use could result in personal injuryor property damage from fire orexplosion, or area re-classification.

CSASpecial Conditions of Safe Use

No special conditions for safe use.

Refer to table 1-4 for approval information, figure 11-1for the CSA loop schematic, and figure 11-2 for theCSA nameplate.

FMSpecial Conditions of Safe Use

No special conditions for safe use.

Refer to table 1-5 for approval information, figure 11-3for the FM loop schematic, and figure 11-4 for FMnameplate.

ATEX Intrinsic Safety, Dust

Special Conditions for Safe Use

1. This apparatus can only be connected to anintrinsically safe certified equipment and thiscombination must be compatible as regards theintrinsically safe rules.

2. The electrical parameters of this equipment mustnot exceed any following values:UO� 30 V; IO �226 mA; PO� 1.4 W

3. Operating ambient temperature: −40�C to + 80�C

Refer to table 1-6 for additional approval information,and figure 11-5 for the ATEX Intrinsic Safety, Dustnameplate.

ATEX Flameproof, Dust


Operating ambient temperature: −40�C to + 85�C

Refer to table 1-6 for additional approval information,and figure 11-6 for ATEX Flameproof, Dustnameplate.

2

DVC6000 SIS

May 20072-4

ATEX Type n, Dust


Operating ambient temperature: −40�C to + 80�C

Refer to table 1-6 for additional approval information,and figure 11-7 for ATEX Type n, Dust nameplate.

IECEx Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Flameproof

Conditions of Certification

Ex ia / Ex d / Ex n

1. Warning: Electrostatic charge hazard. Do notrub or clean with solvents. To do so could resultin an explosion.

EX d / Ex n

2. Do not open while energized.

Refer to table 1-7 for additional approval information,and figure 11-8 for the IECEx nameplate.

NEPSI Intrinsic Safety, Dust andFlameproof, Dust

Notes for Safe Use of the Certified Product

DVC6000 Series digital valve controllers (designatedas controller hereafter) have been proved to be inconformity with the requirements specified in thenational standards GB3836.1-2000, GB3836.2-2000,GB3836.4-2000, and GB12476.1-2000 throughinspections conducted by National Supervision andInspection Centre for Explosion Protection and Safetyof Instrumentation (NEPSI). The Ex markings for theproducts are Ex d II CT5 (acetylene not included),DIPA21T5 or Ex ia II CT5, DIPA21T5 respectively andtheir Ex certificate numbers are GYJ04504 andGYJ04505. When using the product , the user shouldpay attention to the items stated below:

1. The specific product types of approved DVC6000Series digital valve controllers this time are DVC6010,DVC6020 and DVC6030.

2. The enclosure of the controller provides agrounding terminal, and the user should install areliable grounding wire connected to it when mountingand using the controller.

3. The controller�s cable entrance (1/2 NPT) must befitted with a cable entry device which is Ex-approvedthrough inspection of explosion protection, inconformity with relevant standards of GB3836 and hasa corresponding rating of explosion protection.

4. The maximum operating ambient temperaturerange of the controller is −40�C to +80�C.

5. The principle of �Opening equipment�s cover isallowed only after the power is off � must be abided bywhen using and maintaining the controller in the field.

6. The values for intrinsically safe parameters of thecontroller (Intrinsically safe type) are as follow:Ui = 30V, Ii = 226mA, Pi = 1.4W, Ci = 5nF, Li = 0.55mH

7. While the controller forms an intrinsically safeexplosion protection system together with acorresponding associated equipment safety barrier,the following requirements must be met: Uo �Ui , Io�Ii, Po �Pi , Co �Ci + Cc, Lo �Li + Lc

Note

Where Cc and Lc represent distributingcapacitance and inductance of theconnecting cable respectively.

8. The safety barrier must be placed at safetylocation, and the instruction manuals of both theproduct and fitted safety barrier must be followed whileconducting system wiring and using the product; Theconnecting cable should be a shield cable with thearea of core section being greater than 0.5mm2 and itsshield (or insulation screen) being grounded at a safelocation and insulated from the product enclosure; Thecable should be routed so that the electro-magneticinterference can be eliminated as much as possibleand that the cable distributing parameters ofcapacitance and inductance can be controlled within0.06�F/1mH.

9. The user must not be allowed to replace theinternal electric components of the product andchange the condition of system wiring at will and onhis own.

10. The user must follow the relevant rules specifiedby the product instruction manual, the �15th Section ofElectric Equipment Used in Explosive GaseousEnvironment: Electric Installation in HazardousLocations (except for coal mine)� of GB3836.15-2000standard, the �Design Code for Electric PowerInstallation in Explosive and Fire-hazardousEnvironment� of GB50058-1992 standard, and the�Safety Regulations against dust explosion� ofGB15577-1995 standard while performing installation,operation, and maintenance for the product.

Refer to table 1-8 for additional approval information,and figure 11-9 for the NEPSI nameplate.

2

Installation

May 2007 2-5

29B1674-A / DOC

CAP SCREW, FLANGED

MACHINE SCREW

SHIELD

ADJUSTMENT ARM

CONNECTOR ARMCAP SCREW

PLAIN WASHER

Figure 2-1. Type DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller Mounted on Sliding-Stem Actuators with up to 2 Inches Travel

Mounting

WARNING

Refer to the Installation WARNING atthe beginning of this section.

Type DVC6010 on Sliding-StemActuators Up to 102 mm (4 Inches) ofTravel If ordered as part of a control valve assembly, thefactory mounts the digital valve controller on theactuator, makes pneumatic connections to theactuator, sets up, and calibrates the instrument. If youpurchased the digital valve controller separately, youwill need a mounting kit to mount the digital valvecontroller on the actuator. See the instructions thatcome with the mounting kit for detailed information onmounting the digital valve controller to a specificactuator model.

The Type DVC6010 digital valve controller mounts onsliding-stem actuators with up to 102 mm (4-inch)travel. Figure 2-1 shows a typical mounting on an

actuator with up to 51 mm (2-inch) travel. Figure 2-2shows a typical mounting on actuators with 51 to 102mm (2- to 4-inch) travel. For actuators with greaterthan 102 mm (4-inch) travel, see the guidelines formounting a Type DVC6020 digital valve controller.

Refer to the following guidelines when mountingon sliding-stem actuators with up to 4 inches oftravel. Where a key number is referenced, refer tofigure 10-1.

1. Isolate the control valve from the process linepressure and release pressure from both sides of thevalve body. Shut off all pressure lines to the actuator,releasing all pressure from the actuator. Use lock-outprocedures to be sure that the above measures stay ineffect while you work on the equipment.

2. Attach the connector arm to the valve stemconnector.

3. Attach the mounting bracket to the digital valvecontroller housing.

4. If valve travel exceeds 2 inches, a feedback armextension is attached to the existing 2-inch feedbackarm. Remove the existing bias spring (key 78) fromthe 2-inch feedback arm (key 79). Attach the feedbackarm extension to the feedback arm (key 79) as shownin figure 2-2.

2

DVC6000 SIS

May 20072-6

CAP SCREW, FLANGED

MACHINE SCREW,FLAT HEAD

SHIELD

ADJUSTMENT ARM

CONNECTOR ARM

PLAIN WASHER

MACHINE SCREW

MACHINE SCREW,LOCK WASHER,HEX NUT

LOCK WASHER

LOCK WASHER

HEX NUT

SPACER

HEX NUT, FLANGED

FEEDBACK ARM EXTENSION,BIAS SPRING

Figure 2-2. Type DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller Mounted on Sliding-Stem Actuators with 2 to 4 Inches Travel

A7209/IL

SPRING RELAXED

SPRING UNDER TENSION OFADJUSTMENT ARM PIN

FEEDBACK ARM

ADJUSTMENTARM PIN

BIAS SPRING

BIAS SPRING

A

A

B

B

Figure 2-3. Locating Adjustment Arm Pin in Feedback Arm

5. Mount the digital valve controller on the actuator asdescribed in the mounting kit instructions.

6. Set the position of the feedback arm (key 79) onthe digital valve controller to the no air position by

inserting the alignment pin (key 46) through the holeon the feedback arm as follows:

� For air-to-open actuators (i.e., the actuatorstem retracts into the actuator casing or cylinder as airpressure to the casing or lower cylinder increases),insert the alignment pin into the hole marked ��A��. Forthis style actuator, the feedback arm rotatescounterclockwise, from A to B, as air pressure to thecasing or lower cylinder increases.

� For air-to-close actuators (i.e., the actuatorstem extends from the actuator casing or cylinder asair pressure to the casing or upper cylinder increases),insert the alignment pin into the hole marked ��B��. Forthis style actuator, the feedback arm rotatesclockwise, from B to A, as air pressure to the casing orupper cylinder increases.

NoteWhen performing the following steps,ensure there is enough clearancebetween the adjustment arm and thefeedback arm to prevent interferencewith the bias spring.

7. Apply lubricant to the pin of the adjustment arm. Asshown in figure 2-3, place the pin into the slot of thefeedback arm or feedback arm extension so that thebias spring loads the pin against the side of the armwith the valve travel markings.

2

Installation

May 2007 2-7

PLAIN WASHER

HEX NUT

STUD, CONT THREAD

A LOCK WASHERCAP SCREW

MOUNTING PLATE

CAP SCREW, HEXSOCKET

VENT

PLAIN WASHER

HEX NUT

STUD, CONT THREAD

A

SPACER SECTION A-A

CAM

CAM/ROLLER POSITION MARK

29B1665-B / DOCVENT ADAPTOR

Figure 2-4. Type DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller Mounted on Long-Stroke Sliding-Stem Actuator.

8. Install the external lock washer on the adjustmentarm. Position the adjustment arm in the slot of theconnector arm and loosely install the flanged hex nut.

9. Slide the adjustment arm pin in the slot of theconnector arm until the pin is in line with the desiredvalve travel marking. Tighten the flanged hex nut.

10. Remove the alignment pin (key 46) and store it inthe module base next to the I/P assembly.

11. After calibrating the instrument, attach the shieldwith two machine screws.

Type DVC6020 on Long-Stroke (4 to 24Inch Travel) Sliding-Stem Actuators andRotary Actuators

WARNING


If ordered as part of a control valve assembly, thefactory mounts the digital valve controller on theactuator, makes pneumatic connections to theactuator, sets up, and calibrates the instrument. If youpurchased the digital valve controller separately, you

will need a mounting kit to mount the digital valvecontroller on the actuator. See the instructions thatcome with the mounting kit for detailed information onmounting the digital valve controller to a specificactuator model.

NoteAll cams supplied with FIELDVUEmounting kits are characterized toprovide a linear response.

Type DVC6020 digital valve controllers use a cam(designed for linear response) and roller as thefeedback mechanism. Figure 2-4 shows an example ofmounting on sliding-stem actuators with travels from 4inches to 24 inches. Some long-stroke applications willrequire an actuator with a tapped lower yoke boss.Figures 2-5 and 2-7 show the Type DVC6020mounted on rotary actuators.

As shown in figure 2-5, two feedback arms areavailable for the digital valve controller. Mostlong-stroke sliding-stem and rotary actuatorinstallations use the long feedback arm [62 mm (2.45inches) from roller to pivot point]. Installations on

2

DVC6000 SIS

May 20072-8

TYPICAL MOUNTING WITH SHORT FEEDBACK ARM (FISHER TYPE 1052 SIZE 33 ACTUATOR SHOWN)

TYPICAL MOUNTING WITH LONG FEEDBACK ARM(FISHER TYPE 1061 SIZE 30−68 ACTUATOR SHOWN)

29B2094-A / DOC

29B1672-A / DOC

MOUNTING ADAPTORCAP SCREW, HEX SOCKET

CAM

MACHINE SCREW

MACHINE SCREW

CAP SCREW, HEX SOCKET

CAM

Figure 2-5. Type DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller Mounted on Rotary Actuator

Fisher Type 1051 size 33 and Type 1052 size 20 and33 actuators use the short feedback arm [54 mm (2.13inches) from roller to pivot point]. Make sure thecorrect feedback arm is installed on the digital valvecontroller before beginning the mounting procedure.

Refer to figures 2-4, 2-5, and 2-7 for parts locations.Also, where a key number is referenced, refer to figure10-2. Refer to the following guidelines when mountingon sliding-stem actuators with 4 to 24 inches of travelor on rotary actuators:

1. Isolate the control valve from the process linepressure and release pressure from both sides of thevalve body. Shut off all pressure lines to thepneumatic actuator, releasing all pressure from theactuator. Use lock-out procedures to be sure that theabove measures stay in effect while working on theequipment.

2. If a cam is not already installed on the actuator,install the cam as described in the instructionsincluded with the mounting kit. For sliding-stemactuators, the cam is installed on the stem connector.

3. If a mounting plate is required, fasten the mountingplate to the actuator.

4. For applications that require remote venting, apipe-away bracket kit is available. Follow theinstructions included with the kit to replace the existingmounting bracket on the digital valve controller with

the pipe-away bracket and to transfer the feedbackparts from the existing mounting bracket to thepipe-away bracket.

5. Larger size actuators may require a follower armextension, as shown in figure 2-7. If required, thefollower arm extension is included in the mounting kit.Follow the instructions included with the mounting kitto install the follower arm extension.

6. Mount the Type DVC6020 on the actuator asfollows:

� If required, a mounting adaptor is included in themounting kit. Attach the adaptor to the actuator asshown in figure 2-5. Then attach the digital valvecontroller assembly to the adaptor. The roller on thedigital valve controller feedback arm will contact theactuator cam as it is being attached.

� If no mounting adaptor is required, attach thedigital valve controller assembly to the actuator ormounting plate. The roller on the digital valvecontroller feedback arm will contact the actuator camas it is being attached.

7. For long-stroke sliding-stem actuators, after themounting is complete, check to be sure the rolleraligns with the position mark on the cam (see figure 2-4). If necessary, reposition the cam to attainalignment.

2

Installation

May 2007 2-9

19B3879−A / DOC

MOUNTING BRACKET

TRAVEL INDICATOR

TRAVEL INDICATOR PIN

FEEDBACK ARM

SPACER29B1703-A / DOC

Figure 2-6. Mounting a Type DVC6030 Digital Valve Controller on a Rotary Actuator (Type 1032 Size 425A Shown)

CAP SCREW, HEX SOCKET

CAM

FOLLOWER ARMEXTENSION

MACHINE SCREW,LOCK WASHER,HEX NUT

CAP SCREW

29B1673-A / DOC

Figure 2-7. Type DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller with LongFeedback Arm and Follower Arm Extension Mounted on a Rotary

Actuator

Type DVC6030 on Quarter-TurnActuators

WARNING


If ordered as part of a control valve assembly, thefactory mounts the digital valve controller on theactuator, makes pneumatic connections to theactuator, sets up, and calibrates the instrument. If youpurchased the digital valve controller separately, youwill need a mounting kit to mount the digital valvecontroller on the actuator. See the instructions thatcome with the mounting kit for detailed information onmounting the digital valve controller to a specificactuator model.

Figure 2-6 shows the Type DVC6030 digital valvecontroller mounted on a quarter-turn actuator. Refer tofigure 2-6 for parts locations. Refer to the followingguidelines when mounting on quarter-turn actuators:

NoteDue to NAMUR mounting limitations,do not use the heavier stainless steelType DVC6030S in vibration service.

1. Isolate the control valve from the process linepressure and release pressure from both sides of thevalve body. Shut off all pressure lines to the pneumaticactuator, releasing all pressure from the actuator. Uselock-out procedures to be sure that the abovemeasures stay in effect while working on theequipment.

2. If necessary, remove the existing hub from theactuator shaft.

2

DVC6000 SIS

May 20072-10

19B3879-A / DOC-1

STARTING POSITION OF THE ACTUATOR TRAVELINDICATOR ASSEMBLY IF INCREASING PRESSUREFROM OUTPUT A DRIVES THE INDICATORCOUNTERCLOCKWISE (THE POTENTIOMETERSHAFT WILL ROTATE CLOCKWISE AS VIEWEDFROM THE BACK OF THE FIELDVUE INSTRUMENT)

STARTING POSITION OF TRAVELINDICATOR ASSEMBLY (DIGITALVALVE CONTROLLER OUTPUT A AT 0 PSI. )

IN THIS POSITION, THE �B� HOLEIN THE FEEDBACK ARM WILL BEALIGNED WITH THE REFERENCEHOLE IN THE DIGITAL VALVECONTROLLERS HOUSING.

MOVEMENT OF TRAVELINDICATOR ASSEMBLY WITHINCREASING PRESSURE FROMOUTPUT A.

ACTUATOR SHAFT MOVEMENT

DVC6030 FEEDBACKARM MOVEMENT

E0989 / DOC

Figure 2-8. Explanation of Travel Indicator Starting Position and Movement, if Clockwise Orientation is Selected for �Travel Sensor Motion� in AMS� ValveLink� Software or the 375 Field Communicator

3. If a positioner plate is required, attach thepositioner plate to the actuator as described in themounting kit instructions.

4. If required, attach the spacer to the actuator shaft.

Refer to figures 2-8 and 2-9. The travel indicatorassembly can have a starting position of 7:30 or10:30. Determine the desired starting position thenproceed with the next step. Considering the top of thedigital valve controller as the 12 o�clock position, in thenext step attach the travel indicator, so that the pin ispositioned as follows:

� If increasing pressure from the digital valvecontroller output A rotates the potentiometer shaftclockwise (as viewed from the back of theinstrument), mount the travel indicator assembly suchthat the arrow is in the 10:30 position, as shown infigure 2-8.

� If increasing pressure from the digital valvecontroller output A rotates the potentiometer shaftcounterclockwise (as viewed from the back of theinstrument), mount the travel indicator assembly suchthat the arrow is in the 7:30 position, as shown infigure 2-9.

NoteAMS ValveLink Software and the 375Field Communicator use theconvention of clockwise (figure 2-8)and counterclockwise (figure 2-9)when viewing the potentiometer shaftfrom the back of the FIELDVUEinstrument.

5. Attach the travel indicator, to the shaft connector orspacer as described in the mounting kit instructions.

6. Attach the mounting bracket to the digital valvecontroller.

7. Position the digital valve controller so that the pinon the travel indicator engages the slot in the feedbackarm and that the bias spring loads the pin as shown infigure 2-10. Attach the digital valve controller to theactuator or positioner plate.

8. If a travel indicator scale is included in themounting kit, attach the scale as described in themounting kit instructions.

2

Installation

May 2007 2-11

19B3879-A / DOC-2

STARTING POSITION OF THE TRAVEL INDICATORASSEMBLY IF INCREASING PRESSURE FROMOUTPUT A DRIVES THE INDICATOR CLOCKWISETHE POTENTIOMETER SHAFT WILL ROTATECOUNTERCLOCKWISE AS VIEWED FROM THEBACK OF THE FIELDVUE INSTRUMENT.

STARTING POSITION OFTRAVEL INDICATOR ASSEMBLY(DIGITAL VALVE CONTROLLEROUTPUT A AT 0 PSI).

MOVEMENT OF TRAVELINDICATOR ASSEMBLY WITHINCREASING PRESSURE FROMOUTPUT A.

IN THIS POSITION, THE �A� HOLEIN THE FEEDBACK ARM WILL BEALIGNED WITH THE REFERENCEHOLE IN THE DIGITAL VALVECONTROLLERS HOUSING.

DVC6030 FEEDBACKARM MOVEMENT

ACTUATOR SHAFT MOVEMENT

E0989

Figure 2-9. Explanation of Travel Indicator Starting Position and Movement if Counterclockwise Orientation is Selected for �Travel Sensor Motion� in AMS� ValveLink� Software or the 375 Field Communicator

FEEDBACK ARMBIAS SPRING

TRAVEL INDICATOR PIN

48B4164-B / DOC

HOLE AHOLE B

Figure 2-10. Positioning Travel Indicator Pin in the Feedback Arm(Viewed as if Looking from the Type DVC6030

toward the Actuator)

Mounting the Type 67CFR FilterRegulator A Type 67CFR filter regulator, when used with theDVC6000 Series digital valve controllers, can bemounted three ways.

Integral-Mounted RegulatorRefer to figure 2-11. Lubricate an O-ring and insert itin the recess around the SUPPLY connection on thedigital valve controller. Attach the Type 67CFR filterregulator to the side of the digital valve controller.Thread a 1/4-inch socket-head pipe plug into theunused outlet on the filter regulator. This is thestandard method of mounting the filter regulator.

Yoke-Mounted RegulatorMount the filter regulator with 2 cap screws to thepre-drilled and tapped holes in the actuator yoke.

Thread a 1/4-inch socket-head pipe plug into theunused outlet on the filter regulator. The O-ring is notrequired.

2

DVC6000 SIS

May 20072-12

NOTE:APPLY LUBRICANT1

1

W8077-1 SIS

TYPE 67CFR

CAP SCREWS

O-RING

SUPPLY CONNECTION

Figure 2-11. Mounting the Type 67CFR Regulator on a DVC6000 Series Digital Valve Controller

Casing-Mounted RegulatorUse the separate Type 67CFR filter regulator casingmounting bracket provided with the filter regulator.Attach the mounting bracket to the Type 67CFR andthen attach this assembly to the actuator casing.Thread a 1/4-inch socket-head pipe plug into theunused outlet on the filter regulator. The O-ring is notrequired.

Pressure Connections

WARNING


NoteMake pressure connections to thedigital valve controller using tubingwith at least 3/8-inch diameter.

Pressure connections are shown in figure 2-12. Allpressure connections on the digital valve controller are1/4 NPT internal connections. Use 10 mm (3/8-inch)tubing for all pneumatic connections. If remote ventingis required, refer to the vent subsection.

OUTPUT ACONNECTION

SUPPLYCONNECTION

OUTPUT BCONNECTION

1/2 NPTCONDUITCONNECTIONS(BOTH SIDES)

W7963 SIS

Figure 2-12. DVC6000 Series Digital Valve ControllerConnections

Supply Connections

WARNING

To avoid personal injury and propertydamage resulting from bursting ofparts, do not exceed maximum supplypressure.

2

Installation

May 2007 2-13

WARNING

Severe personal injury or propertydamage may occur from anuncontrolled process if theinstrument air supply is not clean, dryand oil-free. While use and regularmaintenance of a filter that removesparticles larger than 40 microns indiameter will suffice in mostapplications, check with an EmersonProcess Management field office andindustry instrument air qualitystandards for use with corrosive air orif you are unsure about the properamount or method of air filtration orfilter maintenance.

Supply pressure must be clean, dry air that meets therequirements of ISA Standard 7.0.01. For additionalinformation on supply refer to the SIS Safety Manual,Form 5743.

A Fisher Type 67CFR filter regulator, or equivalent,may be used to filter and regulate supply air. A filterregulator can be integrally mounted onto the side ofthe digital valve controller, casing mounted separatefrom the digital valve controller, or mounted on theactuator mounting boss. Supply and output pressuregauges may be supplied on the digital valve controller.The output pressure gauges can be used as an aid forcalibration.

Connect the nearest suitable supply source to the 1/4 NPT IN connection on the filter regulator (iffurnished) or to the 1/4 NPT SUPPLY connection onthe digital valve controller housing (if Type 67CFRfilter regulator is not attached).

Output Connections A factory mounted digital valve controller has itsoutput piped to the pneumatic input connection on theactuator. If mounting the digital valve controller in thefield, connect the 1/4 NPT digital valve controlleroutput connections to the pneumatic actuator inputconnections.

Single-Acting ActuatorsWhen using a single-acting direct digital valvecontroller (relay type A or C) on a single-actingactuator always connect OUTPUT A to the actuatorpneumatic input. Only when using relay type C in thespecial application (i.e. solenoid health monitoring) doyou need to connect OUTPUT B to the monitoring line.

W9131-1

Figure 2-13. Type DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller Mounted onType 585C Piston Actuator

When using a single-acting reverse digital valvecontroller (relay type B) on a single-acting actuatoralways connect OUTPUT B to the actuator pneumaticinput. Only when using relay type B in the specialapplication (i.e. solenoid health monitoring) do youneed to connect OUTPUT A to the monitoring line.

Double-Acting ActuatorsDVC6000 Series digital valve controllers ondouble-acting actuators always use relay type A.When the relay adjustment disc is properly set,OUTPUT A will vent to the atmosphere and OUTPUTB will fill to supply pressure when power is removedfrom the positioner.

To have the actuator stem extend from the cylinderwith increasing input current, connect OUTPUT A tothe upper actuator cylinder connection and connectOUTPUT B to the lower cylinder connection. Figure2-13 shows a digital valve controller connected to adouble-acting piston actuator that will extend the stemwith increasing input current.

To have the actuator stem retract into the cylinder withincreasing input current, connect OUTPUT A to thelower cylinder connection and OUTPUT B to the uppercylinder connection.

2

DVC6000 SIS

May 20072-14

24/48 VDC 110/220 VAC, etc.

Port A

CONTROL SIGNAL(4−20 mA, 0−20 mA, 0−24 VDC)

Port B

SUPPLY PRESSURE

MONITORING LINE

CONTROL LINE

DVC6000 SIS DIGITAL VALVECONTROLLER WITH RELAY C

SPRING RETURN ACTUATORE1048

Figure 2-14. Pneumatic Hookup for Solenoid Testing

Special Construction to Support LogicSolver Initiated Solenoid Valve HealthMonitoring

In single-acting actuator applications with a solenoidvalve installed, the DVC6000 can be configured tomonitor the health of the solenoid valve test, which isinitiated by the Logic Solver. This is accomplished byconnecting the unused output port B from theDVC6000 to the pneumatic monitoring line betweenthe solenoid valve and the actuator, as shown in figure2-14. When single-acting, direct relay C is installed,the �unused� output port is port B. When single-acting,reverse relay B is used, the unused port is port A.

NoteThis application is called �specialapplication� in the Setup Wizard relayselection.

This configuration is not possible witha double-acting actuator or whenusing relay A in single-acting mode.

Vent

WARNING

Personal injury or property damagecan occur from cover failure due tooverpressure. Ensure that thehousing vent opening is open andfree of debris to prevent pressurebuildup under the cover.

The relay output constantly bleeds supply air into thearea under the cover. The vent opening at the back ofthe housing should be left open to prevent pressurebuildup under the cover. If a remote vent is required,the vent line must be as short as possible with aminimum number of bends and elbows.

To connect a remote vent to Type DVC6010 andDVC6030 digital valve controllers� remove theplastic vent (key 52, figure 10-1). The vent connectionis 3/8 NPT internal. At a minimum, 12.7 mm (1/2-inch)tubing should be used when installing a remote vent toprevent excessive pressure from building up under thecover.

To connect a remote vent to Type DVC6020 digitalvalve controllers� Replace the standard mountingbracket (key 74, figure10-2) with the vent-awaybracket (key 74). Install a pipe plug in the vent-awaymounting bracket (key 74). Mount the digital valvecontroller on the actuator as described in the

2

Installation

May 2007 2-15

Installation section of this manual. The ventconnection is 3/8 NPT internal. At a minimum, 12.7mm (1/2-inch) tubing should be used when installing aremote vent to prevent excessive pressure frombuilding up under the cover.

Electrical Connections

WARNING


To avoid personal injury resultingfrom electrical shock, do not exceedthe maximum input voltage specifiedin table 1-2 of this instruction manual,or on the product nameplate. If theinput voltage specified differs, do notexceed the lowest specified maximuminput voltage.

Select wiring and/or cable glands thatare rated for the environment of use(such as hazardous area, ingressprotection, and temperature). Failureto use properly rated wiring and/orcable glands can result in personalinjury or property damage from fire orexplosion.

WARNING

To avoid personal injury or propertydamage caused by fire or explosion,remove power to the instrumentbefore removing the terminal boxcover in an area which contains apotentially explosive atmosphere orhas been classified as hazardous.

SAFETY GROUND

LOOP−

LOOP+

EARTH GROUND

TALK+

TALK−

39B3399-B Sheet 2

Figure 2-15. DVC6000 Series Digital Valve ControllerTerminal Box

4 to 20 mA Loop Connections The digital valve controller is normally powered by acontrol system output card. The use of shielded cablewill ensure proper operation in electrically noisyenvironments.

WARNING

To avoid personal injury or propertydamage from the sudden release ofprocess pressure, be sure the valve isnot controlling the process. The valvemay move when the source is applied.

Wire the digital valve controller as follows: (unlessindicated otherwise, refer to figures 10-1 through 10-3for identification of parts).

1. Remove the terminal box cap (key 4) from theterminal box (key 3).

2. Bring the field wiring into the terminal box. Whenapplicable, install conduit using local and nationalelectrical codes which apply to the application.

3. Refer to figure 2-15. Connect the control systemoutput card positive wire ��current output�� to the LOOP+ screw terminal in the terminal box. Connect thecontrol system output card negative (or return) wire tothe LOOP − screw terminal.

2

DVC6000 SIS

May 20072-16

WARNING

Personal injury or property damage,caused by fire or explosion, canresult from the discharge of staticelectricity. Connect a 14 AWG (2.08mm2) ground strap between thedigital valve controller and earthground when flammable orhazardous gases are present. Referto national and local codes andstandards for groundingrequirements.

To avoid static discharge from theplastic cover, do not rub or cleanthe cover with solvents. Clean witha mild detergent and water only.

4. As shown in figure 2-15, two ground terminals areavailable for connecting a safety ground, earth ground,or drain wire. These ground terminals are electricallyidentical. Make connections to these terminalsfollowing national and local codes and plant standards.

5. Replace and hand tighten the terminal box cap.When the loop is ready for startup, apply power to thecontrol system output card.

NoteWhen the DVC6000 SIS is operatingunder normal conditions at 4 mA (tripcondition is 20 mA) be sure to applyno less than 4 mA.

Test Connections

WARNING

Personal injury or property damagecaused by fire or explosion may occurif this connection is attempted in apotentially explosive atmosphere, orin an area that has been classified ashazardous. Confirm that areaclassification and atmosphereconditions permit the safe removal ofthe terminal box cap beforeproceeding.

Test connections inside the terminal box can be usedto measure loop current across a 1 ohm resistor.

1. Remove the terminal box cap.

2. Adjust the test meter to measure a range of 0.001to 0.1 volts.

3. Connect the positive lead of the test meter to theTEST + connection and the negative lead to the TEST− connection inside the terminal box.

4. Measure Loop current as:

Voltage (on test meter) � 1000 = milliamps

example:

Test meter Voltage X 1000 = Loop Milliamps

0.004 X1000 = 4.0 milliamperes

0.020 X 1000 = 20.0 milliamperes

5. Remove test leads and replace the terminal boxcover.

Communication Connections

WARNING

Personal injury or property damagecaused by fire or explosion may occurif this connection is attempted in apotentially explosive atmosphere or inan area that has been classified ashazardous. Confirm that areaclassification and atmosphereconditions permit the safe removal ofthe terminal box cap beforeproceeding.

A HART communicating device, such as a Model 375Field Communicator or a personal computer runningAMS ValveLink Software communicating through aHART modem, interfaces with the DVC6000 Seriesdigital valve controller from any wiring termination

2

Installation

May 2007 2-17

The voltage available at the instrument is not the voltage measured at the instrument terminals. Once the instrument isconnected, the instrument limits the measured voltage to approximately 9.0 to 10.5 volts.

Obtain filter voltage drop. The measured drop will be different than this value. The measured filter voltage dropdepends upon control system output voltage, the intrinsic safety barrier (if used), and the instrument. See note 2.

HARTFILTER

CONTROLSYSTEM

+−

COMPLIANCE VOLTAGE

VOLTAGEAVAILABLE ATTHEINSTRUMENT

+−

RINTRINSIC SAFETYBARRIER(if used)

Control system compliance voltage

= Voltage available at the instrument

� Filter voltage drop (if used)

Example Calculation

18.5 volts (at 21.05 mA)

� 2.3 volts (for HF300 series filter)

� Intrinsic safety barrier resistance (if used) x maximum loop current � 2.55 volts (121 ohms x 0.02105 amps)

TOTAL LOOPCABLE RESISTANCE

� Total loop cable resistance x maximum loopcurrent

� 1.01 volts (48 ohms x 0.02105 amps for1000 feet of Belden 9501 cable)

= 15.19 volts available�if safety barrier (2.55 volts)is not used

1

2

NOTES:

1

2

Calculate Voltage Available at the Instrument asfollows:

Figure 2-16. Determining Voltage Available at the Instrument

point in the 4�20 mA loop. If you choose to connectthe HART communicating device directly to theinstrument, attach the device to the LOOP + andLOOP − terminals or to the TALK + and TALK −connections inside the terminal box to provide localcommunications with the instrument.

Wiring Practices

Logic Solver or Control SystemRequirements There are several parameters that should be checkedto ensure the Logic Solver or control system arecompatible with the DVC6000 Series digital valvecontroller.

Voltage Available The voltage available at the DVC6000 Series digitalvalve controller must be at least 11 VDC. The voltageavailable at the instrument is not the actual voltagemeasured at the instrument when the instrument is

connected. The voltage measured at the instrument islimited by the instrument and is typically less than thevoltage available.

As shown in figure 2-16, the voltage available at theinstrument depends upon:

� the control system compliance voltage

� if a filter or intrinsic safety barrier is used, and

� the wire type and length.

The control system compliance voltage is themaximum voltage at the control system outputterminals at which the control system can producemaximum loop current.

The voltage available at the instrument may becalculated from the following equation:

Voltage Available = [Control System ComplianceVoltage (at maximum current)] − [filter voltage drop (ifa HART filter is used)] − [total cable resistance �maximum current] − [barrier resistance x maximumcurrent].

The calculated voltage available should be greaterthan or equal to 11 VDC.

Table 2-1 lists the resistance of some typical cables.

2

DVC6000 SIS

May 20072-18

The following example shows how to calculate thevoltage available for a Honeywell� TDC2000 controlsystem with a Type HF340 HART filter, and 1000 feetof Belden� 9501 cable:

Voltage available = [18.5 volts (at 21.05 mA)] − [2.3volts] − [48 ohms � 0.02105 amps]

Voltage available = [18.5] − [2.3] − [1.01]

Voltage available = 15.19 volts

Compliance Voltage If the compliance voltage of the control system is notknown, perform the following compliance voltage test.

1. Disconnect the field wiring from the control systemand connect equipment as shown in figure 2-17 to thecontrol system terminals.

2. Set the control system to provide maximum outputcurrent.

3. Increase the resistance of the 1 KΩ potentiometer,shown in figure 2-17, until the current observed on themilliammeter begins to drop quickly.

4. Record the voltage shown on the voltmeter. This isthe control system compliance voltage.

For specific parameter information relating to yourcontrol system, contact your Emerson ProcessManagement sales office.

Maximum Cable Capacitance The maximum cable length for HART communicationis limited by the characteristic capacitance of thecable. Maximum length due to capacitance can becalculated using the following formulas:

Length(ft) = [160,000 − Cmaster(pF)] � [Ccable(pF/ft)]

Length(m) = [160,000 − Cmaster(pF)] � [Ccable(pF/m)]

where:

160,000 = a constant derived for FIELDVUEinstruments to insure that the HART network RC timeconstant will be no greater than 0.65 μs (per the HARTspecification).

Cmaster = the capacitance of the control system orHART filter

Ccable = the capacitance of the cable used (see table 2-1)

The following example shows how to calculate thecable length for a Foxboro� I/A control system (1988)with a Cmaster of 50, 000 pF and a Belden 9501 cablewith characteristic capacitance of 50pF/ft.

Length(ft) = [160,000 − 50,000pF] � [50pF/ft]

Length = 2200 ft.

The HART communication cable length is limited bythe cable characteristic capacitance. To increasecable length, select a wire with lower capacitance perfoot. Contact your Emerson Process Managementsales office for specific information relating to yourcontrol system.

2

Installation

May 2007 2-19

Table 2-1. Cable Characteristics

Cable Type Capacitance(1)

pF/ftCapacitance(1)

pF/mResistance(2)

Ohms/ftResistance(2)

Ohms/m

BS5308/1, 0.5 sq mm 61.0 200 0.022 0.074

BS5308/1, 1.0 sq mm 61.0 200 0.012 0.037

BS5308/1, 1.5 sq mm 61.0 200 0.008 0.025

BS5308/2, 0.5 sq mm 121.9 400 0.022 0.074

BS5308/2, 0.75 sq mm 121.9 400 0.016 0.053

BS5308/2, 1.5 sq mm 121.9 400 0.008 0.025

BELDEN 8303, 22 awg 63.0 206.7 0.030 0.098

BELDEN 8441, 22 awg 83.2 273 0.030 0.098

BELDEN 8767, 22 awg 76.8 252 0.030 0.098

BELDEN 8777, 22 awg 54.9 180 0.030 0.098

BELDEN 9501, 24 awg 50.0 164 0.048 0.157

BELDEN 9680, 24 awg 27.5 90.2 0.048 0.157

BELDEN 9729, 24 awg 22.1 72.5 0.048 0.157

BELDEN 9773, 18 awg 54.9 180 0.012 0.042

BELDEN 9829, 24 awg 27.1 88.9 0.048 0.157

BELDEN 9873, 20 awg 54.9 180 0.020 0.0691. The capacitance values represent capacitance from one conductor to all other conductors and shield. This is the appropriate value to use in the cable length calculations.2. The resistance values include both wires of the twisted pair.

CIRCUITUNDERTEST

VOLTMETER

MILLIAMMETER

1 K� POTENTIOMETER

A6192-1/IL

Figure 2-17. Voltage Test Schematic

2

DVC6000 SIS

May 20072-20

Installation in a Safety InstrumentedSystemA DVC6000 SIS instrument may be used in a SafetyInstrumented System (SIS) to control operation of asafety block valve or vent valve. The actuator may beeither single-acting or double-acting with spring return.DVC6000 SIS instruments will have the label shown infigure 2-18 on the terminal box cover.

The digital valve controller may be installed with asolenoid valve in either a 4-wire system, (figure 2-20),in a 2-wire system (figure 2-21), or a 2-wire systemwithout a solenoid valve (figure 2-22). The digital valvecontroller ships from the factory with the DIP switch onthe printed wiring board set to the correct position perthe ordered option.

When operating with a 4−20 mA current signal, thedigital valve controller must be setup for point-to-pointoperation. When operating with a voltage signal, thedigital valve controller must be setup for multidropoperation. The operational mode is determined by aDIP switch on the printed wiring board. As shown infigure 2-19, the nameplate indicates the operationalmode set on the printed wiring board at the factory.For information on verifying or changing the switchposition, refer to Replacing the PWB Assembly andSetting the DIP Switch and table 9-3 in theMaintenance section.

Installation in a 4-Wire System Figure 2-20 is an example of the digital valve controllerinstalled in a 4-wire system. In this installation, twoseparate signals are used: a 4−20 mA DC signal (fromthe Logic Solver or DCS) for the digital valve controllerand a 24 VDC signal (from the Logic Solver) for thesolenoid valve.

NoteWhen a solenoid valve operated by anindependent power supply is usedpneumatically in series with aDVC6000, the power source could be24/48 VDC, 110/220 VAC, etc. Powersupply is dependent on customerspecifications.

The digital valve controller control mode is set to�analog�. When a shutdown condition exists, the logic

Figure 2-18. Terminal Box Cover Label on DVC6000 Digital ValveControllers with Instrument Level SIS

INFORMATION IN THIS AREA INDICATES THEOPERATIONAL MODE SET AT THE FACTORY.PT-PT INDICATES POINT-TO-POINT LOOP,MULTI INDICATES MULTI-DROP LOOPE0768

Figure 2-19. Typical Digital Valve Controller Nameplate

solver (or DCS) activates the solenoid valve and alsocuts the current to the digital valve controller to 0 or 4mA, thus causing the valve to move to its zero travelposition. In this installation, the switch on the digitalvalve controller printed wiring board must be set forpoint-to-point operation.

To set the digital valve controller control mode in anSIS 4-wire system, from the Online menu selectSetup, Basic Setup, and Setup Wizard.

The Setup Wizard will automatically setup theinstrument for a 4-wire installation based upon theprinted wiring board DIP switch setting.

Installation in a 2-Wire System Figures 2-21 and 2-22 are examples of the digitalvalve controller installed in a 2-wire system. In theseinstallations the logic solver provides a single 24 VDCsignal that powers both the digital valve controller andthe optional solenoid valve (a low power consumptionmodel such as the ASCO� EF8316G303 orEF8316G304). The digital valve controllers controlmode is set to �digital�. When a shutdown conditionexists, the logic solver cuts power to both the digitalvalve controller and the solenoid valve (if connected),causing the valve to move to it�s zero travel position. AType LC340 line conditioner is required to allow HARTcommunications over the segment. Alternatively, aHART pass through multiplexer such as MTL orPepperl+Fuchs Elcon, may be used, eliminating theneed for a line conditioner when installed as per figure2-22.

2

Installation

May 2007 2-21

NOTES:1/4-18 NPT X 3/8 OD TUBINGELECTRICAL WIRING

DVC6000 SERIES DIGITALVALVE CONTROLLER

LOGIC SOLVER

SUPPLY

SINGLE-ACTING SPRING AND DIAPHRAGM ACTUATOROR PISTON ACTUATOR WITH SPRING RETURN19B6913-B

19B6914-AE0769-1

VENT

VENT

24 VDC OR CUSTOMER SPECIFIEDPOWER SUPPLY

4-20 mA DC(NORMALLY VALVE IS FULLY OPEN WITH20 mA SIGNAL TO DIGITALVALVE CONTROLLER)

PRINTED WIRING BOARDDIP SWITCH SET FORPOINT-TO-POINT (DOWNPOSITION)

PISTON ACTUATORVALVE DISCFAILS CLOCKWISEON LOSS OF AIR

Figure 2-20. Example of DVC6000 Series Digital Valve Controller Installed in a 4-Wire SIS System

Table 2-2. Maximum Loop Wire Resistance per Logic SolverOutput Voltage(2)

Logic SolverOutputVoltage(VDC)

MaximumLoop WireResistance

(Ohms)

Maximum Wire Length (feet)(1)

22 AWG 20 AWG 18 AWG 16 AWG

24.0023.7523.5023.2523.00

32.027.022.017.012.0

952804655506357

14291205982759536

2381200916371265893

31752679218316871190

22.7522.50

7.02.0

20860

31389

521149

694198

1. Wire length includes both wires in a twisted pair.2. Installation includes line conditioner and low power solenoid valve with a 20.4 voltengagement voltage.

NoteUse of a solenoid valve is optional,and dependent on stroking speed andother operating conditions.

The line conditioner introduces an approximate 2.0volt drop in the SIS system wiring. If used with a lowpower solenoid valve (such as the ASCO ModelEF8316G303 or EF8316G304) a guaranteedengagement voltage of 20.4 volts at maximumtemperature must be used.The solenoid valve (if connected) requires up to 42 mAto pull in. The digital valve controller set for multidropoperation draws approximately 8 mA. Based on theseconditions, table 2-2 lists the maximum loop wireresistance permitted for various logic solver outputvoltages. The table also lists maximum length of wireof various gauges that may be used.

2

DVC6000 SIS

May 20072-22


AN AIR SUPPLY LINE IS NEEDED FOR ANEXTERNAL PILOTED SOLENOID VALVE. CONTACTYOUR EMERSON PROCESS MANAGEMENT SALESOFFICE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

LOGIC SOLVER

TYPE LC340 LINECONDITIONER


SINGLE-ACTING SPRING AND DIAPHRAGM ACTUATOROR PISTON ACTUATOR WITH SPRING RETURN

ASCO (LOW POWER CONSUMPTION)SOLENOID VALVEDE-ENERGIZEDEXTERNAL PILOT LOADINGGASKET COVER - INTERNAL - COVERED EXTERNAL - EXPOSED

(NORMALLY VALVE IS FULLY OPEN WITHWITH VOLTAGE TO DIGITAL VALVE CONTROLLER)


VENT

VENT

24VDC

PRINTED WIRING BOARDDIP SWITCH SET FOR MULTIDROP (UP POSITION)

19B6915-A19B6917-AE0770-1

1

1

A

BSUPPLY

Figure 2-21. Example of DVC6000 Series Digital Valve Controller Installed in a 2-Wire SIS System

The line conditioner is intended for installation in acontrol or marshalling cabinet near the logic solverfield wiring terminals. In some installations, such asshown in figure 2-22, where no solenoid is used, aHART pass-through multiplexer may be used without aline conditioner. The LC340 line conditioner will beneeded when a low-power solenoid is connected tothe same 2-wire loop as the digital valve controller asshown in figure 2-21.

Make connections to the line conditioner as follows:

CAUTION

Do not overtighten the wiringconnection terminals or subject themto heavy lateral (pushing) loads. Thiscould damage the line conditioner.

1. Be sure the digital valve controller DIP switch is setfor multidrop operation.

2. Connect the digital valve controller LOOP +terminal to the line conditioner FLD + terminal.

3. Connect the digital valve controller LOOP −terminal to the line conditioner FLD − terminal.

4. Connect the solenoid valve field terminals to theline conditioner FLD + and − terminals.

5. Connect the logic solver output to the lineconditioner SYS + and − terminals.

Using the digital valve controller in a 2-wire system(multi-drop operation) with an ASCO low powersolenoid valve, model EF8316G303 or EF8316G304(or an equivalent low power solenoid valve) requires aline conditioner. Using a low power solenoid valverequires a separate air supply. Ensure that thesolenoid valve�s �selection gasket� is in the �ExternalPosition�. A minimum of 15 psi operating pressuredifferential is required. For more information, refer tothe ASCO catalog or contact your Emerson ProcessManagement sales office.

See the separate FIELDVUE Type LC340 LineConditioner Instruction Manual - Form 5719 fordetailed installation information.

2

Installation

May 2007 2-23


LOGIC SOLVER

TYPE LC340 LINECONDITIONER


SINGLE-ACTING SPRING AND DIAPHRAGM ACTUATOROR PISTON ACTUATOR WITH SPRING RETURN

(NORMALLY VALVE IS FULLY OPEN WITHWITH VOLTAGE TO DIGITAL VALVE CONTROLLER)


24VDC

PRINTED WIRING BOARDDIP SWITCH SET FOR MULTIDROP (UP POSITION)

E1043

A

BSUPPLY

Figure 2-22. Example of DVC6000 Series Digital Valve Controller Installed in a 2-Wire SIS System (without a Solenoid Valve)

To set the digital valve controller Control Mode foroperation in an SIS 2-wire system select Configure /Setup, Basic Setup, and Setup Wizard from the Onlinemenu.

The Setup Wizard will automatically setup theinstrument for a 2-wire installation based upon theprinted wiring board DIP switch setting.

NoteTo ensure correct installation, followthe Basic Setup procedures asdescribed in Section 4.

2

DVC6000 SIS

May 20072-24

8−20 mA SIGNAL FROM LOGIC SOLVER

SHIELD TOGROUNDING LUG

AUX +

LOOP +LOOP −

DVC6000 SIS

LCP100

SHIELDED CABLE

NOTE: THE LOGIC SOLVER MINIMUM OUTPUT MUST BE AT LEAST 8 mA. THE LCP100,WHEN POWERED BY THE LOOP, CONSUMES APPROXIMATELY 4 mA.

PREFERRED METHOD FOR NEW OR RETROFIT INSTALLATIONS

AUX − (UNUSED)

AUX +LOOP +LOOP −

SHIELD TOGROUNDINGLUG

TO AUX +ON DVC6000 SIS

LOOP +FROM LOGIC SOLVER

TO LOOP + ON DVC6000 SIS

LOOP −FROM LOGIC SOLVER

TO LOOP − ON DVC6000 SIS

SHIELD NOTCONNECTED

E1046

Figure 2-23. Wiring for 8−20 mA Loop-Powered Configuration (Wiring to LCP100, then DVC6000 SIS)

LCP100 (Local Control Panel)Installation The LCP100 Local Control Panel has four (4)mounting holes for on-site mounting of the device. TheLCP100 must be installed so that the wiringconnections are on the bottom to preventaccumulation of moisture inside the box.

Electrical connections are shown in figures 2-23 and2-24. There are two different ways to power theLCP100. The first method uses loop current to power

the LCP100. However, because the LCP100consumes energy to drive the lights andmicroprocessor, minimum current signal from the logicsolver must be 8 mA. If the logic solver can notprovide an output range of 8−20 mA, then the externalpower method must be used. The second methodrequires an external 24 VDC source to power theLCP100. Ensure that the DIP switch position isproperly set for the desired mode of operation (looppowered or 24 VDC powered).

When installing the cover, apply no more than 20 in�lbf to prevent the metal inserts from pulling out.

2

Installation

May 2007 2-25

4−20 mA SIGNAL FROM LOGIC SOLVER

AUX +LOOP +LOOP −

DVC6000 SIS

LCP100

SHIELDED CABLE

NOTE: DO NOT CONNECT THE LOOP + TERMINAL IN THE LCP100 TO THE LOOP + TERMINALIN THE DVC6000 SIS. THIS WILL CAUSE THE LCP100 TO UNNECESSARILY CONSUME 4 mA.

SHIELD TOGROUNDING LUG

24VDC

AUX −

TO AUX −ON DVC6000 SIS

TO AUX + ON DVC6000 SIS

24VDC +

24VDC −

AUX −LOOP +

AUX +LOOP −

SHIELD TOGROUNDINGLUG

SIMPLE METHOD FOR INSTALLING AN LCP100 TOAN EXISTING DVC6000 SIS INSTRUMENT WHEN

24 VDC POWER IS AVAILABLE

SHIELD NOTCONNECTED

E1047

Figure 2-24. Wiring for 24 VDC External Power Configuration

2

DVC6000 SIS

May 20072-26

2


May 2007 3-1

3-3

Section 3 Model 375 Field CommunicatorBasics

Display 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the Keypad 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

On/Off Key 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Navigation Keys 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enter Key 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tab Key 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alphanumeric Keys 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Backlight Adjustment Key 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Function Key 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Multifunction LED 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the Touch Screen 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the Soft Input Panel Keyboard 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Menu Structure 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Offline Operation 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving Setup and Calibration Data 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Polling 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Information 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reviewing Instrument Device Descriptions 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simulation 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Online Operation 3-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Displaying the Field CommunicatorDevice Description Revision 3-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

DVC6000 SIS

May 20073-2

Figure 3-1. Model 375 Field Communicator

ALPHANUMERIC KEYS

IrDA INTERFACE(TOP)

HART AND fieldbusCOMMUNICATIONTERMINALS (TOP)

TOUCH SCREENDISPLAY

NAVIGATION KEYS(FOUR ARROW KEYS)

TAB KEY

ON/OFF KEY

MULTIFUNCTION LEDBACKLIGHTADJUSTMENT KEY

POWER SUPPLYCHARGERCONNECTION (SIDE)

FUNCTION KEY

ENTER KEY

STYLUS(BACK)

OPTIONALEXPANSIONPORT (SIDE)

DVC6000: Tag

1 Setup & Diag

3 Travel 100% 4 Valve SP 100%

2 Analog In 20mA

BLINKING HEARTINDICATESCOMMUNICATIONWITH A FIELDVUEINSTRUMENT

HOTKEY

SCRATCHPAD

NoteThe Model 375 Field Communicatordevice description revision (DD)determines how the FieldCommunicator interfaces with theinstrument. For information ondisplaying the device descriptionrevision, see page 3-5.

This section discusses the display, keypad, and menustructure for the Field Communicator, shown in figure3-1. It includes information for displaying the FieldCommunicator device description revision number. Forinformation on connecting the Field Communicator tothe instrument, see the Installation section. For moreinformation on the Field Communicator, such asspecifications and servicing, see the User�s Manual forthe Field Communicator 00375-0047-0001, includedwith the Field Communicator. This manual also isavailable from Rosemount Inc., Measurement Division.

Display The Field Communicator communicates information toyou through a 1/4 VGA (240 by 320 pixels)monochrome touch screen. It has a viewing area ofapproximately 9 cm by 12 cm.

Using the Keypad

On/Off Key The on/off key is used to turn the Field Communicatoron and off.

From the Main Menu, select HART Application to runthe HART application. On startup, the HARTApplication automatically polls for devices.

If a HART-compatible device is found, the FieldCommunicator displays the Online menu. For moreinformation on Online and Offline operation, see MenuStructure in this section.

The on/off key is disabled while any applications areopen, making it necessary for you to exit the 375 MainMenu before using the on/off key. This feature helps toavoid situations where the Field Communicator couldbe unintentionally turned off while a device�s output isfixed or when configuration data has not been sent toa device.

Navigation KeysFour arrow navigation keys allow you to move throughthe menu structure of the application. Press the rightarrow ( ) navigation key to navigate further into themenu.

Enter Key The enter key allows you perform the highlighted item,or to complete an editing action. For example, if youhighlight the Cancel button, and then push the enterkey, you will cancel out of that particular window. Theenter key does not navigate you through the menustructure.

Tab Key The tab key allows you to move between selectablecontrols.

Alphanumeric KeysFigure 3-2 shows the alphanumeric keypad. Dataentry, and other options, using letters, number and

3


May 2007 3-3

Figure 3-2. Model 375 Field Communicator Alphanumeric andShift Keys

DEF

8

GHI

9

JKL

4 5 6TUV

1

0

WXYZ

2 3# % & ABC

MNO

, ( ) �

Copy Paste Hot Key

Insert + Hot Key

/

−

PQRS

7

�

other characters can be performed using this keypad.The 375 Field Communicator will automaticallydetermine the mode depending upon the inputnecessary for the particular field.

To enter text when in alphanumeric mode, press thedesired keypad button in quick repetition to scrollthrough the options to attain the appropriate letter ornumber.

For example, to enter the letter �Z�, press the 9 keyquickly four times.

The alphameric keys are also used for the Fast Keysequence. The Fast Key sequence is a sequence ofnumerical button presses, corresponding to the menuoptions that lead you to a given task. See the Model375 Field Communicator Menu Structures at thebeginning of this manual.

Backlight Adjustment Key The backlight adjustment key has four settingsallowing you to adjust the intensity of the display.Higher intensities will shorten the battery life.

Function Key The function key allows you to enable the alternatefunctionality of select keys. The grey characters on thekeys indicate the alternate functionality. Whenenabled, the orange multifunction LED light will appearand an indication button can be found on the soft inputpanel (SIP). Press the key again to disable thefunction key.

Multifunction LEDThe multifunction LED indicates when the 375 FieldCommunicator is in various states. Green signifies thatthe Field Communicator is on, while flashing greenindicates that it is in power saving mode. Green andorange indicate that the function key is enabled, and agreen and orange flash indicates that the on/off buttonhas been pressed long enough for the FieldCommunicator to power up.

Using the Touch ScreenThe touch screen display allows you to select andenter text by touching the window.

Tap the window once to select a menu item or toactivate a control. Double-tap to access the variousoptions associated with the menu item.

CAUTION

The touch screen should be contactedby blunt items only. The preferred itemis the stylus that is included with the375 Field Communicator. The use of asharp instrument can cause damage tothe touch screen interface.

Use the back arrow button( ) to return to theprevious menu. Use the terminate key ( ) in theupper right corner of the touch screen to end theapplication.

Using the Soft Input Panel (SIP)Keyboard As you move between menus, different dynamicbuttons appear on the display. For example, in menusproviding access to on-line help, the HELP buttonmay appear on the display. In menus providing accessto the Home menu, the HOME button may appear onthe display. In many cases the SEND label appearsindicating that you must select the button on thedisplay to send the information you have entered onthe keypad to the FIELDVUE instrument�s memory.Online menu options include:

3

DVC6000 SIS

May 20073-4

� Hot Key

Tap the Hot Key from any Online window to displaythe Hot Key menu. This menu allows you to quickly:

� Change the instrument mode

� Change the control mode

� Change the instrument protection

� Change tuning to improve response

The Hot Key can also be accessed by enabling thefunction key, and pressing the 3 key on thealphanumeric key pad.

For details on instrument mode, control mode,protection, tuning sets, and other configurationparameters, see the Detailed Setup section of thismanual.

� SCRATCHPAD is a text editor that allowsyou to create, open, edit and save simple text (.txt)documents.

� HELP�gives you information regarding thedisplay selection.

� SEND�sends the information you have enteredto the instrument.

� HOME�takes you back to the Online menu.

� EXIT�takes you back to the menu from whichyou had requested the value of a variable that can onlybe read.

� ABORT�cancels your entry and takes you backto the menu from which you had selected the currentvariable or routine. Values are not changed.

� OK�takes you to the next menu or instructionscreen.

� ENTER�sends the information you haveselected to the instrument or flags the value that is tobe sent to the instrument. If it is flagged to be sent, theSEND dynamic label appears as a function keyselection.

� ESC�cancels your entry and takes you back tothe menu from which you had selected the currentvariable or routine. Values are not changed.

� SAVE�saves information to the internal flash orthe configuration expansion module.

Menu StructureThe Field Communicator is generally used in twoenvironments: offline (when not connected to aninstrument) and online (connected to an instrument).

Offline Operation Selecting HART Application when not connected to aFIELDVUE instrument causes the Field Communicatorto display the message �No device found at address 0.Poll?� Selecting �Yes� or �No� will bring you to theHART Application menu. Three choices are availablefrom this screen: Offline, Online and Utility. The Offlinemenu allows you to create offline configurations, aswell as view and change device configurations storedon the 375 Field Communicator. The Utility menuallows you to set the polling option, change thenumber of ignored status messages, view theavailable Device Descriptions, perform a simulation,and view HART diagnostics.

Saving Setup and Calibration DataYou can upload setup and calibration data from theDVC6000 Series digital valve controller and save it inthe Field Communicator Internal Flash or aConfiguration Expansion Module. From the Offlinemenu you can then download this data to multipledevices so that they all contain the same setup andcalibration data. You can also edit the saved data.

You upload setup and calibration data from the Onlinemenu. This requires that the Field Communicator beconnected to a digital valve controller powered by a 4to 20 mA source. To save data from any Online menuselect the SAVE key. Follow the prompts on the FieldCommunicator to save the data to the Internal Flash orthe Configuration EM and name the saved data. Oncethe data is saved, the SAVE key disappears until youchange the data in the instrument.

Downloading the saved data requires that you firstmark the configurable variables you wish to download(the default is all variables unmarked). To do this, fromthe Offline menu select Saved Configuration.Depending on the location of the saved data, selecteither Internal Flash Contents or Configuration EMContents. Select the name for the saved data. Fromthe Saved Configuration menu select Edit.

From the Edit menu you can mark all configurablevariables for download, unmark all configurablevariables so none are downloaded, edit each variableindividually, or save your configuration to the internalflash or the optional configuration expansion module.The following briefly describes each item on the menu.For more information, see the User�s Manual for the375 Field Communicator − 00375-0047-0001.

� Mark All�flags all configurable variables to besent to a HART-compatible device. Configurable

3


May 2007 3-5

variables are those that appear when you editvariables in the configuration using the Edit Individuallyoption.

� Unmark All�removes flags from all configurablevariables in the configuration. Unmarked configurablevariables are not sent to a connectedHART-compatible device.

� Edit Individually�opens the Edit Individuallymenu to permit editing configurable variables in thesaved data. For information on editing configurablevariables, refer to the Field Communicator productmanual.

� Save As...�saves your new configuration to theInternal Flash, or the Configuration EM. For moreinformation on the Save As option, see the FieldCommunicator product manual.

Once the configurable variables are marked fordownload, return to the Saved Configuration menu andselect Save. Follow the prompts on the FieldCommunicator to download the saved data to theinstrument.

Polling When several devices are connected in the same loop,such as for split ranging, each device must beassigned a unique polling address. Use the Pollingoptions to configure the Field Communicator toautomatically search for all or specific connecteddevices.

To enter a polling option, select Utility from the HARTApplication menu. Select Configure HART Application,and then select Polling. Tap ENTER to select thehighlighted option.

The Polling options are:

1. Never Poll�connects to a device at address 0,and if not found will not poll for devices at addresses 1through 15.

2. Ask Before Polling�connects to a device ataddress 0, and if not found asks if you want to poll fordevices at addresses 1 through 15.

3. Always Poll�connects to a device at address 0,and if not found will automatically poll for devices ataddresses 1 through 15.

4. Digital Poll�automatically polls for devices ataddress 0 through 15 and lists devices found by tag.

5. Poll Using Tag�asks for a device HART tag andthen polls for that device.

6. Poll Using Long Tag�allows you to enter the longtag of the device. (Only supported in HART Universalrevision 6 devices.)

To find individual device addresses, use the DigitalPoll option to find each connected device in the loopand list them by tag.

For more information on setting the polling address,see the Detailed Setup section.

System Information To access the Field Communicator systeminformation, select Settings from the 375 Main Menu.

About 375 includes software information about your375 Field Communicator.

Licensing can be viewed when you turn on the 375Field Communicator and in the License settings menu.The license setting allows you to view the license onthe System Card.

Memory settings consists of System Card, InternalFlash size, and Ram size, as well as the ExpansionModule if installed. It allows you to view the totalmemory storage and available free space.

Reviewing Instrument DeviceDescriptionsThe Field Communicator memory module containsdevice descriptions for specific HART-compatibledevices. These descriptions make up the applicationsoftware that the communicator needs to recognizeparticular devices.

To review the device descriptions programmed intoyour Field Communicator, select Utility from the HARTApplication menu, then select Available DeviceDescriptions. The manufacturers with devicedescriptions installed on the Field Communicator arelisted.

Select the desired manufacturer to see the list of thecurrently installed device models, or types, provided bythe selected manufacturer.

Select the desired instrument model or type to see theavailable device revisions that support that instrument.

Simulation The Field Communicator provides a simulation modethat allows you to simulate an online connection to aHART-compatible device. The simulation mode is atraining tool that enables you to become familiar withthe various menus associated with a device withouthaving the Field Communicator connected to thedevice.

To simulate an online connection, select Utility fromthe main menu. Select Simulation then select FisherControls. Select DVC6000 to see the menu structurefor the DVC6000 Series digital valve controller. Referto the appropriate sections of this manual forinformation on the various menus.

3

DVC6000 SIS

May 20073-6

Online Operation The Online menu is the first to be displayed whenconnecting to a HART compatible device. It containsimportant information about the connected device.

The figures in the beginning of this manual show theDVC6000 Series digital valve controller menustructures.

Displaying the Field CommunicatorDevice Description Revision Device Description (DD) Revision is the revisionnumber of the Device Description that resides in theField Communicator. It defines how the Field

Communicator is to interact with the user andinstrument.

Field Communicators with device description revision1 are used with DVC6000 Series instruments withfirmware revision 7. You can display the devicedescription revision when the Field Communicator isOffline or Online:

Offline�To see the Field Communicator devicedescription revision number, from the main menu,select Utility, Simulation, Fisher Controls, andDVC6000.

Online�To see the Field Communicator devicedescription revision number, connect the FieldCommunicator to an instrument connected to a sourcesupplying a 4 to 20 mA signal. From the Online menu,select Device Variables, DD Information.

3

Basic Setup

May 2007 4-1

4-4

Section 4 Basic Setup

Configuration Protection 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument Mode 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Basic Setup 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setup Wizard 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Performance Tuner 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

DVC6000 SIS

May 20074-2

Configuration Protection To setup and calibrate the instrument, the protectionmust be set to None with the Field Communicator. Ifthe protection is not None, changing the protectionrequires placing a jumper across the Auxiliaryterminals in the terminal box.

NoteWhen an LCP100 Control Panel isused, changing protection does notrequire placing the jumper across theAuxiliary terminals in the terminal box.

To remove protection:

1. Connect a 4 to 20 mA source to the instrument.

2. Connect the Field Communicator to the instrumentand turn it on.

3. Press the Hot key on the Field Communicator andselect Protection.

4. From the Protection menu, select None. Whenprompted by the Field Communicator, temporarilyattach the jumper to the AUX + and AUX − terminalsin the instrument terminal box.

Instrument Mode To setup and calibrate the instrument, the instrumentmode must be Out Of Service.

To view/change the instrument mode, press the HotKey and select Instrument Mode. If the mode is notOut Of Service, select Out Of Service from theInstrument Mode menu and press ENTER.

Instrument Mode allows you to either take theinstrument Out of Service or place it In Service.Taking the instrument Out of Service allows you toperform instrument calibration and also allows you tochange setup variables that affect control. See SettingProtection to ensure protection is set correctly prior tooperation.

Basic Setup

WARNING

Changes to the instrument setup maycause changes in the output pressureor valve travel. Depending on theapplication, these changes may upsetprocess control, which could result inpersonal injury or property damage.

WARNING

To avoid personal injury or equipmentdamage caused by the release ofprocess pressure, always use theSetup Wizard to perform setup andcalibration before placing theDVC6000 Series instrument inoperation as an SIS solution for thefirst time. The Setup Wizard sets upthe required parameters for SISsolutions.

NoteTo setup and calibrate the instrument,the protection must be None and theInstrument Mode must be Out OfService. See Configuration Protectionand Instrument Mode at the beginningof this section for information onremoving instrument protection andchanging the instrument mode.

When the DVC6000 Series digital valve controller isordered as part of a control valve assembly, thefactory mounts the digital valve controller and sets upthe instrument as specified on the order. Whenmounting to a valve in the field, the instrument needsto be setup to match the instrument to the valve andactuator.

Before beginning Basic Setup, be sure the instrumentis correctly mounted as described in the Installationsection.

4

Basic Setup

May 2007 4-3

Setup Wizard (1-1-1)

NoteThe Setup Wizard must be run for firsttime installations before placing theDVC6000 in service.

Use the Setup Wizard in the Model 375 FieldCommunicator to setup the digital valve controller foroperation in an SIS solution. The Setup Wizardautomatically sets up the instrument using specifiedactuator information. To access the Setup Wizard,from the Online Menu select Configure/Setup, BasicSetup, and Setup Wizard.

1. When prompted by the Setup Wizard, enter thepressure units (psi, bar, kPa, or kg/cm2).

2. Enter the maximum instrument supply pressure.

After entering the maximum instrument supplypressure, the Setup Wizard prompts you for actuatorinformation.

3. Enter the partial stroke test start point.

4. Indicate if the DVC6000 is connected to anLCP100.

5. Enter the manufacturer of the actuator on whichthe instrument is mounted. If the actuatormanufacturer is not listed, select Other.

6. Enter the actuator model or type. If the actuatormodel is not listed, select Other.

7. Enter the actuator size.

8. Enter the Relay Type.

9. Select whether the valve is open or closed underthe zero power condition, if prompted.

NoteWhen completing steps 3 through 9,refer to table 4-1 for possibleconfigurations for a digital valvecontroller operated by a 4−20 mA inputcurrent (point-to-point mode), andtable 4-2 for possible configurationsfor a digital valve controller operatedby a 0−24 VDC power supply(multidrop mode).

WARNING

If you answer YES to the prompt forpermission to move the valve whenthe Field Communicator isdetermining the travel sensor motion,the instrument will move the valvethrough its full travel range. To avoidpersonal injury and property damagecaused by the release of pressure orprocess fluid, provide sometemporary means of control for theprocess.

10. Indicate if a volume booster or quick release ispresent.

NoteThe use of a Quick Exhaust Valve(QEV) is not recommended for safetyinstrumented system applications. Theuse of a QEV in an SIS application maycause the valve to cycle.

11. Specify if factory defaults should be used for basicsetup. If you select YES for factory default, the FieldCommunicator sets the setup parameters to thevalues listed in table 4-3. If you select NO for thefactory defaults, the setup parameters listed in thetable remain at their previous settings.

Typically the Setup Wizard determines the requiredsetup information based upon the actuatormanufacturer and model specified. However, if youenter other for the actuator manufacturer or theactuator model, then you will be prompted for setupparameters such as:

Actuator Style (select spring & diaphragm, pistonsingle-acting with spring, piston double-acting withspring)

Valve Style (select the valve style, rotary or slidingstem)

On Loss of Instrument Signal, (valve opens orcloses). See Zero Power Condition in the DetailedSetup section.

Feedback Connection (select Rot-All, SS-roller, orSStem-Standard). See Feedback Connection in theDetailed Setup section.

4

DVC6000 SIS

May 20074-4

Table 4-1. Possible Configurations for a Digital Valve Controller operated by 4−20 mASetup Wizard Configuration Operating Conditions Status Monitoring

Relay Type Partial StrokeStart Point

Zero PowerCondition

Input Current Actual Valve Travel Travel SetPoint

Travel

A or C

Open

CloseCommon Application

20 mA Open 100% 100%

OpenLess Common Application

4 mA Open 100% 100%

Close

CloseLess Common Application

4 mA Close 0% 0%

OpenCommon Application

20 mA Close 0% 0%

B

Open


20 mA Open 100% 100%


4 mA Open 100% 100%

Close


4 mA Close 0% 0%


20 mA Close 0% 0%

Table 4-2. Possible Configurations for a Digital Valve Controller operated by 0−24 VDCSetup Wizard Configuration Operating Conditions Status Monitoring

Relay Type Partial StrokeStart Point

Zero PowerCondition

Power Supply Actual Valve Travel Travel SetPoint

Travel

A or C

Open


24 VDC Open 100% 100%


24 VDC Open 100% 100%

Close


24 VDC Close 0% 0%


24 VDC Close 0% 0%

B

Open


24 VDC Open 100% 100%


24 VDC Open 100% 100%

Close


24 VDC Close 0% 0%


24 VDC Close 0% 0%

Partial Stroke Start Point (select the start point forthe Partial Stroke Test; either Valve Open or ValveClose).

LCP100 Local Control Panel (indicate if theinstrument is connected to an LCP100 local controlpanel).

Travel Sensor Motion (increasing air pressurecauses the travel sensor shaft to rotate clockwise orcounterclockwise), The Setup Wizard will ask if it canmove the valve to determine travel sensor motion.

If you answer yes, the instrument may stroke the valvethe full travel span to determine travel sensor rotation.If you answer No, then you will have to specify therotation for increasing air pressure (determine therotation by viewing the end of the travel sensor shaft).See Travel Sensor Motion in the Detailed Setupsection.

Tuning Set (see Tuning Set in the Detailed Setupsection).

4

Basic Setup

May 2007 4-5

After choosing the appropriate tuning set, a messageappears on the display, asking if you would like todownload factory defaults for Setup. Yes isrecommended for Initial Setup. Refer to table 4-3 forfactory download defaults.

Follow the prompts on the Field Communicatordisplay. The calibration procedure uses the valve andactuator stops as the 0% and 100% calibration points.For additional information, refer to Auto CalibrateTravel in the Calibration section.

Once Auto Calibration is complete, you will be askedto enter the desired stroke test speed (default is0.25%/sec). An additional automatic PST calibration isrun to determine the default value or the partial strokepressure limit for single acting actuators (this will bedifferential pressure for double acting) and pressureset point for End Point Pressure Control.

When calibration is complete, you are asked if youwish to adjust the relay (double-acting only). Selectyes to adjust the relay. For additional information, referto Relay Adjustment in the Calibration section.

NoteRelay Adjustment is only available forthe double-acting relay (Relay A).

After instrument setup is completed, and you haveplaced the instrument in service, if End Point PressureControl not enabled, you will be prompted to enable it.Select yes. Refer to Partial Stroke Variables in theDetailed Setup section for more information.

If after completing auto setup and auto calibration thevalve seems slightly unstable or unresponsive, youcan improve operation by selecting PerformanceTuner from the Basic Setup menu. For additionalinformation on using the Performance Tuner tooptimize digital valve controller tuning, refer to thePerformance Tuner information below.

Table 4-3. DVC6000 Series Factory Download Default SettingsSetup Parameter Default Setting

Analog Input Units(1)

Analog In Range High(1)

Analog In Range Low(1)

Control Mode

Restart Control Mode

mA20.0 mA4.0 mAAnalog(1)

Digital(2)

Analog(1)

Digital(2)

Lag TimeInput CharacteristicTravel Limit HighTravel Limit Low

0 secsLinear125%−25%

Travel Cutoff HighTravel Cutoff LowTravel Deviation Alert PointTravel Deviation TimeSet Point Rate OpenSet Point Rate ClosePolling Address

50%50%5.0%10.0 seconds0%/sec0%/sec0

Pressure Deviation Alert PtPressure Deviation Alert Time

5.0 psi(3)

30.0 seconds

Command #3 (Trending) PressureFor double-acting actuatorsFor single-acting actuators

differential output pressureactuator pressure

Valve Set Point(2)

Restart Travel Set Point(2)

Self-Test Shutdown(2)

100% if ZPC = Open0% if ZPC = Closed100% if ZPC = Open0% if ZPC = ClosedAll Failures Disabled

1. Analog mode only − DIP switch set to Multi.2. Digital mode only. − DIP switch set to Pt-Pt3. Adjust to bar, kPa, or kg/cm2 if necessary.

Performance Tuner (1-1-2) The Performance Tuner is used to optimize digitalvalve controller tuning. It can be used with digital valvecontrollers mounted on most sliding-stem and rotaryactuators, including Fisher and other manufacturers�products. Moreover, because the Performance Tunercan detect internal instabilities before they becomeapparent in the travel response, it can generallyoptimize tuning more effectively than manual tuning.Typically, the Performance Tuner takes 3 to 5 minutesto tune an instrument, although tuning instrumentsmounted on larger actuators may take longer.

Access the Performance Tuner by selectingPerformance Tuner from the Basic Setup menu.Follow the prompts on the Field Communicator displayto optimize digital valve controller tuning.

4

DVC6000 SIS

May 20074-6

4

Detailed Setup

May 2007 5-1

5-5

Section 5 Detailed Setup

Menu and Quick Key Sequence Tables Front Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Detailed Setup 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mode and Protection 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mode 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument ModeControl ModeRestart Control ModeBurst Mode

Protection 5-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protection

Response Control 5-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tuning 5-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Travel Tuning 5-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Travel Tuning Set

Travel Tuning SetTravel Proportional GainTravel Velocity GainTravel MLFB Gain

Travel Integral Control EnableTravel Integral GainStabilize/Optimize

Integral Settings 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integral Dead ZoneIntegral Limit

Pressure Tuning 5-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Tuning Set

Pressure Tuning SetPressure Proportional GainPressure MLFB Gain

Pressure Integral Control EnablePressure Integral Gain

Travel/Pressure Control 5-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Travel/Pressure Cutoffs 5-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Travel/Pressure Cutoff HiTravel/Pressure Cutoff Lo

End Point Pressure Control 5-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . End Point Control EnablePST Start PointPressure Set PointPressure Sat Time

5

DVC6000 SIS

May 20075-2

Input Characteristic 5-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Define Custom Characterization 5-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamic Response 5-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SP Rate OpenSP Rate CloseLag Time

Alerts 5-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Alerts 5-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Drive Current ShutdownDrive Signal Alert

Drive Signal Alert EnableDrive Signal

Processor Impaired AlertsOffline/Failed Alert EnablePower Starvation Alert EnableNon-Critical NVM Alert EnableCritical NVM ShutdownFlash ROM ShutdownNo Free Time ShutdownReference Voltage Shutdown

Sensor Alerts 5-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Travel Sensor ShutdownTemperature Sensor ShutdownPressure Sensor Shutdown

Environmental Alerts 5-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aux Terminal Alert

Auxiliary Terminal Alert EnableAuxiliary InputAuxiliary Terminal Mode

Supply Pressure Lo AlertSupply Pressure Lo Alert EnableSupply PressureSupply Pressure Lo Alert Point

Travel Alerts 5-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TravelTravel Set PointTravel Alert Dead BandTravel Deviation AlertTravel Limit AlertsTravel Limit Hi/Lo AlertsTravel Cutoff Alerts

Travel History Alerts 5-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cycle CountCycle Count/Travel Accumulator DeadbandTravel Accumulator

SIS Alerts 5-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PST Pressure LimitPressure Deviation Alert EnablePressure Deviation Alert PointPressure Deviation Time

5

Detailed Setup

May 2007 5-3

Alert Record 5-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alrt Record Not Empty EnabAlrt Record Full EnabDisplay RecordClear RecordAlert Groups

Status 5-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument TimeCalibration and DiagnosticsOperationalIntegrator

Instrument 5-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GeneralUnitsAnalog Input RangeRelay TypeZero Power ConditionMaximum Supply PressureAuxiliary Terminal ModeInstrument Date and TimeCalibration Status and Location

Valve & Actuator 5-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ManufacturerValve Serial NumberValve StyleActuator StyleFeedback ConnectionTravel Sensor Motion

Partial Stroke 5-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PST EnablePST Variables View/EditAuto Test IntervalDVC Power Up

5

DVC6000 SIS

May 20075-4

Detailed SetupThe Detailed Setup selection from the Configure/Setupmenu allows you to configure the digital valvecontroller to your application. Table 5-1 lists the defaultsettings for a standard factory configuration. You canadjust actuator response, set the various modes,alerts, ranges, travel cutoffs and limits. You can alsorestart the instrument and set the protection.

Mode and Protection (1-2-1)

Mode

� Instrument Mode

You can change the instrument mode by selectingMode and Protection, Instrument Mode from theDetailed Setup menu, or press the Hot Key and selectInstrument Mode.

Instrument Mode allows you to either take theinstrument Out Of Service or place it In Service.Taking the instrument Out Of Service allows you toperform instrument calibration and also allows you tochange setup variables that affect control, providedthe calibration/configuration protection is properly set.See Setting Protection.

NoteSome changes that require theinstrument to be taken Out Of Servicewill not take effect until the instrumentis placed back In Service or theinstrument is restarted.

� Control Mode

You can change the control mode by selecting ControlMode from the Mode and Protection menu, or pressthe Hot Key and select Control Mode.

Control Mode lets you define where the instrumentreads its set point. Follow the prompts on the FieldCommunicator display to choose one of the followingcontrol modes: Analog or Digital.

Choose Analog control mode if the instrument is toreceive its set point over the 4�20 mA loop. Normallythe instrument control mode is Analog.

Table 5-1. Factory Default Detailed Setup ParametersSetup Parameter Default Setting(1)

InstrumentConfiguration

Control Mode Analog / Digital(2)

Restart Control Mode Resume Last

Zero Power Condition Valve Closed(2)

Analog In Range Low 4 mA

Analog In Range High 20 mA

Analog Input Units mA

Feedback Connection Rotary − All(2)

Travel Sensor Motion Clockwise(2)

Auxiliary Terminal ModePush Button Partial

Stroke Test

Max Supply Pressure 50(2)

Pressure Units PSI

Temperature Units F

Polling Address 0

Burst Mode Enable No

Burst Command 3

Cmd #3 (Trending) PressureFor double-acting actuators

For single-acting actuators

differential outputpressure

actuator pressure

DynamicResponse andTuning

Tuning Set F(2)

Input Characteristic Linear

Travel Limit High 125%

Travel Limit Low −25%

Travel/Pressure Cutoff High 50%

Travel/Pressure Cutoff Low 50%

Set Point Rate Open 0%/sec

Set Point Rate Close 0%/sec

Set Point Filter Lag Time 0 sec

Partial Stroke Start Point Valve Open(2)

Travel HistoryAlerts

Cycle Count Alert Enable No

Cycle Count Alert Deadband 1%

Cycle Count Alert Point 1,000,000

Travel Accumulator AlertEnable

No

Travel Accumulator Deadband 1%

Travel Accumulator Alert Point 1000000%

Deviation &Other Alerts

Travel Deviation Alert Enable Yes

Travel Deviation Alert Point 5%

Travel Deviation Time 10 sec

Pressure Deviation AlertEnable

Yes

Pressure Deviation Alert Point 2 psi

Pressure Deviation Alert Time 30 sec

Drive Signal Alert Enable Yes

Supply Pressure Alert Enable Yes

Supply Pressure Alert Point 19 psi

Travel Alerts

Travel Alert Lo Enable No

Lo Point −25%

Travel Alert Hi Enable No

Hi Point 125%

Travel Alert Lo Lo Enable No

Lo Lo Point −25%(3)

Travel Alert Hi Hi Enable No

Hi Hi Point 125%(4)

Deadband 5%−continued on next page−

5

Detailed Setup

May 2007 5-5

Table 5-1. Factory Default Detailed Setup Parameters(continued)

Setup Parameter DefaultSetting(1)

Electronic Alerts

Shutdown Activated Yes

Power Starvation Alert Enable No

Non-Critical NVM Alert Enable No

InformationalStatus

Instrument Time Invalid Enable Yes

Calibration in Progress Enable No

Autocalibration in ProgressEnable

No

Diagnostics in Progress Enable No

Diagnostics Data AvailableEnable

Yes

Integrator Saturated Hi Enable Yes

Integrator Saturated Lo Enable Yes

Pressure Control Active Enable Yes

Multi-Drop Alert Enable No

Alert Record

Valve Alerts Enable Yes

Failure Alerts Enable Yes

Misc Alerts Enable No

Alert Record Not Empty Enable Yes

Alert Record Full Enable Yes1. The settings listed are for standard factory configuration. DVC6000 Seriesinstruments can also be ordered with custom configuration settings. For the defaultcustom settings, refer to the order requisition.2. If the instrument is shipped mounted on an actuator, these values depend uponthe actuator on which the instrument is mounted.3. Lo Lo point is 1% when used with LCP100.4. Hi Hi point is 99% when used with LCP100.

Choose Digital control mode if the instrument is toreceive its set point digitally by a 0−24 VDC controlsignal, via the HART communications link.

A third mode, Test, is also displayed. Normally theinstrument should not be in the Test mode. The FieldCommunicator automatically switches to this modewhenever it needs to stroke the valve duringcalibration or stroke valve, for example. However, ifyou abort from a procedure where the instrument is inthe Test mode, it may remain in this mode. To takethe instrument out of the Test mode, select ControlMode then select either Analog or Digital.

� Restart Ctrl Mode

Restart Control Mode lets you choose which operatingmode you want the instrument to be in after a restart.Access Restart Control mode by selecting Restart CtrlMode from the Mode and Protection menu. Follow theprompts on the Field Communicator display to definethe restart control mode as Resume Last, Analog, orDigital.

� Burst Mode

Enabling burst mode provides continuouscommunication from the digital valve controller. Burstmode applies only to the transmission of burst modedata (analog input, travel target, pressure, and travel)and does not affect the way other data is accessed.

Access to information in the instrument is normallyobtained through the poll/response of HART

communication. The Model 375 Field Communicatoror the control system may request any of theinformation that is normally available, even while theinstrument is in burst mode. Between each burst modetransmission sent by the instrument, a short pauseallows the Field Communicator or control system toinitiate a request. The instrument receives the request,processes the response message, and then continues�bursting� the burst mode data.

NoteDo not use burst mode while usingthe HART Loop Interface Monitor(HIM) from Moore Industries withDVC6000 instrument level SIS.

To enable burst mode, select Burst Mode, and BurstEnable from the Mode and Protection menu.

� Burst Enable�Yes or no. Burst mode mustbe enabled before you can change the burst modecommand.

� Burst Command�There are four burst modecommands. Command 3 is recommended for usewith the Rosemount Model 333 HART Tri-LoopHART-to-analog signal converter. The other threeare not used at this time.

� Cmd 3(Trending)Press�Command 3provides the following variables:

Primary variable�analog input in % or ma,

Secondary variable�travel target in % of rangedtravel,

Tertiary variable�supply or output pressure in psig,bar, kPa, or kg/cm2. Select Select Cmd 3 Press fromthe Burst menu to select if the output A, output B,differential (A−B), or supply pressure is sent.

Quaternary variable�travel in % of ranged travel.

5

DVC6000 SIS

May 20075-6

Protection

� Protection

When the digital valve controller is in SIS mode, andprotection is on, the instrument cannot be taken Out ofService. Protection must be turned off to change theinstrument mode.

To change an instrument�s protection, press the Hotkey on the Field Communicator and select Protectionor select Protection from the Detailed Setup menu.

Two levels of protection are available:

� None�Neither setup nor calibration is protected.Allows changing calibration and setup parameters.

� Config & Calib�Both setup and calibration areprotected. Prohibits changing calibration and protectedsetup parameters.

Table 5-3 lists configurable parameters in theinstrument and the requirements for modifying theseparameters, in terms of instrument mode andprotection.

To change an instrument�s protection, press the Hotkey on the Field Communicator and select Protectionor from the Online menu, select Configure/Setup,Detailed Setup, Mode and Protection, and Protection.Select the desired level of protection. Follow theprompts on the Field Communicator display to set theprotection level.

Response Control (1-2-2)Select Configure/Setup, Detailed Setup, andResponse Control. Follow the prompts on the FieldCommunicator display to configure the followingresponse control parameters: Tuning, Tvl/PressControl (Travel/Pressure Control), Input Char (InputCharacteristic) Define Custom Char (Define CustomCharacteristic), and Dynamic Response.

Tuning

Travel Tuning (1-2-2-1-1)

WARNING

Changes to the tuning set may causethe valve/actuator assembly to stroke.To avoid personal injury and propertydamage caused by moving parts,keep hands, tools, and other objectsaway from the valve/actuatorassembly.

Table 5-2. Gain Values for Preselected Travel Tuning SetsTuning

SetProportional Gain Velocity Gain Minor Loop

Feedback Gain

BCDEFG

2.04.44.85.56.27.2

3.03.03.03.03.13.6

353535353534

HIJKLM

8.49.7

11.313.115.518.0

4.24.85.66.06.06.0

312723181212

X(Expert)

User Adjusted User Adjusted User Adjusted

� Tvl Tuning Set (1-2-2-1-1-1)

Tvl Tuning Set� There are twelve tuning sets tochoose from. Each tuning set provides apreselected value for the digital valve controllergain settings. Tuning set B provides the slowestresponse and M provides the fastest response.Table 5-2 lists the proportional gain, velocity gainand minor loop feedback gain values forpreselected tuning sets.

In addition, you can select User Adjusted or Expert,which allows you to modify tuning of the digitalvalve controller. With User Adjusted, you specifythe proportional gain; an algorithm in the FieldCommunicator calculates the velocity gain andminor loop feedback gain. With Expert you canspecify the proportional gain, velocity gain, andminor loop feedback gain.

NoteUse Expert tuning only if standardtuning has not achieved the desiredresults.

Stabilize/Optimize or PerformanceTuner may be used to achieve thedesired results more rapidly thanExpert tuning.

Table 5-4 provides tuning set selection guidelinesfor Fisher actuators. These tuning sets are onlyrecommended starting points. After you finishsetting up and calibrating the instrument, you mayhave to select either a higher or lower tuning set toget the desired response. You can use thePerformance Tuner to optimize tuning.

For an actuator not listed in the tables, you canestimate a starting tuning set by calculating thecasing or cylinder volume. Then, in the tables, find

5

Detailed Setup

May 2007 5-7

an actuator with the closest equivalent volume anduse the tuning set suggested for that actuator.

Tvl Prop Gain�Travel Proportional Gain is theproportional gain for the travel control tuning set.Changing this parameter will also change thetuning set to Expert.

Tvl Velocity Gain�Travel Velocity Gain is thevelocity gain for the travel control tuning set.Changing this parameter will also change thetuning set to Expert.

Tvl MLFB Gain�Travel MLFB Gain is the minorloop feedback gain for the travel control tuning set.Changing this parameter will also change thetuning set to Expert.

� Tvl Integ Enable�Yes or No. Enable theintegral setting to improve static performance bycorrecting for error that exists between the traveltarget and actual travel. Travel Integral Control isdisabled by default.

� Tvl Integ Gain�Travel Integral Gain is theratio of the change in output to the change in input,based on the control action in which the output isproportional to the time integral of the input.

� Stabilize/Optimize�Stabilize/Optimizepermits you to adjust valve response by changingthe digital valve controller tuning.

If the valve is unstable, select Decrease Responseto stabilize valve operation. This selects the nextlower tuning set (e.g., F to E). If the valve responseis sluggish, select Increase Response to make the

valve more responsive. This selects the next highertuning set (e.g., F to G).

If after selecting Decrease Response or IncreaseResponse the valve travel overshoot is excessive,select Decrease Damping to select a dampingvalue that allows more overshoot. Select IncreaseDamping to select a damping value that willdecrease the overshoot. When finished, selectdone.

� Performance Tuner

The Performance Tuner is used to optimize digitalvalve controller tuning. It can be used with digital valvecontrollers mounted on most sliding-stem and rotaryactuators, including Fisher and other manufacturers�products. Moreover, because the Performance Tunercan detect internal instabilities before they becomeapparent in the travel response, it can generallyoptimize tuning more effectively than manual tuning.Typically, the Performance Tuner takes 3 to 5 minutesto tune an instrument, although tuning instrumentsmounted on larger actuators may take longer.

Integral Settings (1-2-2-1-2)

� Integ DeadZ�Integral Dead Zone is awindow around the Primary Setpoint in whichintegral action is disabled. This feature is used toeliminate friction induced limit cycles around thePrimary Setpoint when the integrator is active. TheDead Zone is configurable from 0% to 2%,corresponding to a symmetric window from 0% to+/−2% around the Primary Setpoint. Default valueis 0.25%.

� Integ Limit�The Integral Limit provides anupper limit to the integrator output. The high limit isconfigurable from 0 to 100% of the I/P drive signal.

5

DVC6000 SIS

May 20075-8

Table 5-3. Conditions for Modifying DVC6000 Series Digital Valve Controller Parameters

ParametersIn Service Out of Service

Protected Unprotected Protected Unprotected

Mode andProtection

Instrument ModeControl Mode(1)

Restart Cont. Mode(1)

Burst Mode EnableBurst Command Cmd #3 (Trending) PressureProtection

- - -- - -- - -

- - -- - -

- - -- - -- - -

- - -- - -

Response andControl

Travel Tuning SetTravel Proportional GainTravel Velocity GainTravel MLFB GainTravel Integral EnableTravel Integral GainStabilize / OptimizePerformance Tuner

- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -

- - -- - -

- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -

Integral Dead ZoneIntegral Limit

- - -- - -

- - -- - -

Pressure Tuning SetPressure Proportional GainPressure MLFBPressure Integral EnablePressure Integral Gain

- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -

- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -

Travel / Pressure Cutoff HiTravel / Pressure Cutoff Lo

- - -- - -

- - -- - -

- - -- - -

End Point Pressure Control EnablePartial Stroke Start PointPressure Set PointPressure Saturation Time

- - -- - -- - -- - -

- - -- - -

- - -- - -- - -- - -

Input CharacteristicDefine Custom Char.

- - -- - -

- - -- - -

- - -- - -

Set Point Rate OpenSet Point Rate CloseLag Time

- - -- - -- - -

- -- - -- - -

- -- - -- - -

Alerts

Drive Current ShutdownDrive Signal AlertDrive Signal(1)

- - -

- - -

- - -

- - -

- - -

- - -

- - -

Offline/Failed Alert EnablePower Starvation Alert EnableNon-Critical NVM Alert Enable

Critical NVM Shutdown Flash ROM Shutdown No Free Time ShutdownReference Voltage ShutdownTemp Sensor ShutdownTravel Sensor ShutdownPress Sensor Shutdown

- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -

- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -

- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -

Aux Terminal Alert EnableAux Input(1)

Aux Terminal Mode

- - -- - -

- - -

- - -- - -

- - -

Supply Pressure Lo Alert EnableSupply Pressure(1)

Supply Press Lo Alert Point

- - -

- - -

- - -

- - -

Travel(1)

Travel Set Point(1)

Travel Alert Deadband

- - -- - -

- - -- - -

- - -- - -

- - -- - -

Travel Deviation Alert EnableTravel Deviation Alert PointTravel Deviation Time

�indicates parameter may be modified for instrument mode and protection shown.1. Information only.

−Continued−

5

Detailed Setup

May 2007 5-9

Table 5-3. Conditions for Modifying DVC6000 Series Digital Valve Controller Parameters (Continued)



Alerts

Travel Alert Hi Hi EnableTravel Alert Lo Lo EnableTravel Alert Hi Hi Point Travel Alert Lo Lo Point

Travel Alert Hi EnableTravel Alert Lo EnableTravel Alert Hi Point Travel Alert Lo Point

Travel Limit / Cutoff Hi Alert EnableTravel Limit / Cutoff Lo Alert EnableTravel / Pressure Cutoff HiTravel / Pressure Cutoff Lo

- - -- - -

- - -- - -

- - -- - -

Cycle Count Alert EnableCycle CountCycle Count Alert Point

Cycle Count / Tvl Accum Deadband

Travel Accumulator Alert EnableTravel AccumulatorTravel Accumulator Alert Point

Partial Stroke Pressure LimitPressure Deviation Alert EnablePressure Deviation Alert PointPressure Deviation Time

Alert Record Not Empty EnableAlert Record Full EnableDisplay Record(1)

Clear Record

- - -

- - -

- - -

- - -

Failure Group EnableValve Group EnableMisc Group Enable

Status

Instrument Time Invalid EnableInstrument Time and Date

Calibration in Progress EnableAutocalibration in Progress EnableDiagnostics in Progress EnableDiagnostic Data Available Enable

Pressure Control Active EnableMulti-Drop Enable

Integrator Saturated Hi EnableIntegrator Saturated Lo EnableIntegrator LimitIntegrator DeadZ

- - -- - -

- - -- - -

Instrument

HART TagMessageDescriptorDateValve Serial NumberInstrument Serial NumberPolling Address

- - -- - -- - -

- - -

- - -- - -- - -

Pressure Units Temperature UnitsAnalog Input UnitsAnalog Input Range HighAnalog Input Range Low

- - -

- - -- - -- - -

- - -

- - -- - -- - -

- - -

- - -- - -- - -


−Continued−

5

DVC6000 SIS

May 20075-10

Table 5-3. Conditions for Modifying DVC6000 Series Digital Valve Controller Parameters (Continued)



Valve & Actuator

Relay TypeZero Power ConditionMax Supply PressureAux Terminal ModeInst Date and TimeLast Calibration Status(1)

Calibration Location(1)

- - -- - -- - -- - -

- - -- - -

- - -- - -- - -- - -

- - -- - -

- - -- - -- - -- - -

- - -- - -

- - -- - -

Manufacturer(1)

Valve Serial NumberValve StyleActuator StyleFeedback ConnectionTravel Sensor Motion

- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -

- - -

- - -- - -- - -- - -

- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -

- - -

SIS / PartialStroke

Partial Stroke Test EnablePartial Stroke Press LimitMax Travel MovementTest SpeedTest Pause TimeAuto Test IntervalDVC Power Up

- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -

- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -

- - -

- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -


Pressure Tuning (1-2-2-1-3)

WARNING

Changes to the tuning set may causethe valve/actuator assembly to stroke.To avoid personal injury and propertydamage caused by moving parts,keep hands, tools, and other objectsaway from the valve/actuatorassembly.

� Press Tuning Set (1-2-2-1-3-1)

Press Tuning Set�There are twelve PressureTuning Sets to choose from. Each tuning setprovides a preselected value for the digital valvecontroller gain settings. Tuning set B provides theslowest response and M provides the fastestresponse.

Tuning set B is appropriate for controlling apneumatic positioner. Table 5-6 lists the

proportional gain, pressure integrator gain andminor loop feedback gain values for preselectedtuning sets.

In addition, you can specify Expert tuning andindividually set the pressure proportional gain,pressure integrator gain, and pressure minor loopfeedback gain. Individually setting or changing anytuning parameter will automatically change thetuning set to X (expert).

NoteUse Expert tuning only if standardtuning has not achieved the desiredresults.

Stabilize/Optimize and performancetuner may be used to achieve thedesired results more rapidly thanExpert tuning.

5

Detailed Setup

May 2007 5-11

Table 5-4. Actuator Information for Basic Setup

ActuatorManufacturer

ActuatorModel Actuator Size Actuator Style

StartingTuning

Set

FeedbackConnection

Travel Sensor Motion

Relay A or C Relay B

Fisher

585C & 585CR

2550, 6060, 80

100, 130

Piston Dbl w/ orw/o Spring. See

actuator instructionmanual andnameplate.

FJLM

SStem-Standardfor travels up to

4 inches. SStem-Roller for longer

travels

Depends upon pneumatic connections.See description for Travel Sensor

Motion

657

3034, 4045, 50

46, 60, 70, 76, &80-100

Spring &Diaphragm

HKL

M

SStem-Standard Clockwise Counterclockwise

667

3034, 4045, 50

46, 60, 70, 76, &80-100

Spring &Diaphragm

HKL

M

SStem-Standard Counterclockwise Clockwise

1051 & 1052

20, 303340

60, 70

Spring &Diaphragm

HIKM

Rotary Clockwise Counterclockwise

1061

304060

68, 80, 100, 130

Piston Dbl w/oSpring

JKLM

RotaryDepends upon pneumatic connections.

See description for Travel SensorMotion

1066 20, 27, 75 Piston Dbl w/oSpring

Specify RotaryDepends upon pneumatic connections.

See description for Travel SensorMotion

1066SR20

27, 75 Piston Sgl w/SpringGL Rotary

Depends upon mounting style, seeactuator instruction manual and table

5-5

Table 5-5. Travel Sensor Motion Selections for Type DVC6030on Type 1066SR Actuators

Mounting StyleTravel Sensor Motion

Relay A or C Relay B

A Clockwise Counterclockwise

B Counterclockwise Clockwise

C Counterclockwise Clockwise

D Clockwise Counterclockwise

Press Prop Gain�Pressure Proportional Gain isthe proportional gain for the pressure control tuningset. Changing this parameter will also change thetuning set to Expert.

Press MLFB Gain�Pressure MLFB Gain is theminor loop feedback gain for the pressure controltuning set. Changing this parameter will alsochange the tuning set to Expert.

� Press Integ Enable�Yes or No. Enable thepressure integral setting to improve staticperformance by correcting for error that existsbetween the pressure target and actual pressure.Pressure Integral Control is disabled by default.

Table 5-6. Gain Values for Preselected Pressure Tuning Sets

Tuningset

PressureProportional Gain

PressureIntegrator

Gain

PressureMinor Loop

Feedback GainBCDEFG

0.52.22.42.83.13.6

0.30.10.10.10.10.1

353535353534

HIJKLM

4.24.85.66.67.89.0

0.10.10.10.10.10.1

312723181212

X(Expert)

User Adjusted User Adjusted User Adjusted

� Press Integ Gain�Pressure Integral Gain(also called reset) is the gain factor applied to thetime integral of the error signal between desiredand actual pressure. Changing this parameter willalso change the tuning set to Expert.

5

DVC6000 SIS

May 20075-12

Tvl/Press Control (1-2-2-2)

Tvl/Press Cutoffs (1-2-2-2-1)

� Tvl/Press Cut Hi�Travel Cutoff High definesthe high cutoff point for the travel in percent (%) ofranged input current.

� Tvl/Press Cut Lo�Travel Cutoff Low definesthe low cutoff point for the travel set point.

Travel cutoffs are adjustable when the DVC6000SIS is operating with a 4−20 mA current input. TheSetup Wizard automatically sets travel cutoffs at50%, making the DVC6000 SIS tier work like anon-off device. At current levels from 4.0 to 11.99mA, the DVC6000 SIS will provide minimum outputpressure, and at 12 to 20 mA, the DVC6000 SISwill provide full output pressure.

You can customize valve response to the controlsignal by changing the travel cutoffs. For example,it is possible to have the valve throttle between 10and 90% travel, but work as an on-off valvebetween 0% to 10% and 90% to 100% travel. Theuser now has a standard throttling control valvebetween 10% and 90% travel. Outside of thisrange, the valve will move to its travel extreme (0%or 100%).

NoteIf you run the Setup Wizard afteradjusting the Travel Cutoffs, they willrevert back to the default values. Youwill need to reset the Travel Cutoffs tothe desired settings.

NoteThe partial stroke test cannot beconducted by the Field Communicatoror AMS ValveLink Software while thedigital valve controller is in its normaltravel control mode (with adjustablecutoffs set to a different value than thedefault).

WARNING

Using the auxiliary terminal (pushbutton) for partial stroke testing whilethe DVC6000 digital valve controller isin point-to-point mode may causechanges in output pressure andtravel, resulting in process instability.Depending on the application, thesechanges may upset the process,which may result in personal injury orproperty damage.

If the auxiliary terminal button ispressed for more than 3 seconds, butless than 5 seconds, the digital valvecontroller will drive the valve from itsexisting travel position to 100% travelcondition for a fail close valve (or 0%travel for a fail open valve) andperform the partial stroke test. Oncethe partial stroke test is completed,the digital valve controller will bringthe valve back to its original travel,corresponding to the control setpoint.

NoteIn a typical 0−24 VDC de-energize-to-trip operating system, a digital valvecontroller with the single-acting directrelay will provide full output pressureto port A when 24 VDC is applied, andminimum (near 0) output pressure toport A when 0 VDC is applied. With thesingle-acting direct relay, there wouldbe no output pressure from port B.

Other configurations of the relay areavailable (see table 4-2). An example ofthis flexibility is the use of asingle-acting reverse relay that willsupply full pressure output at 0 VDCinput. This configuration can be usefulto provide the benefits of Partial ValveStroke Diagnostics but minimize thespurious trip rate (the power to thedigital valve controller can be lostwithout tripping the valve), but wouldonly be recommended when asolenoid is provided to take the valveto the safe position

5

Detailed Setup

May 2007 5-13

Table 5-7. Guidelines for Manually Setting Pressure Set PointActuator Type Relay Type Zero Power Condition Partial Stroke Start Point Pressure Set Point

Single Acting

A or C

ClosedOpen Psupply − 2 psig

Closed 2 psig

OpenOpen 2 psig

Closed Psupply − 2 psig

B

ClosedOpen 2 psig


OpenOpen Psupply − 2 psig

Closed 2 psig

Double Acting A

ClosedOpen Psupply − 5 psig

Closed 5 psig − Psupply

OpenOpen 5 psig − Psupply


End Pt Press Control (1-2-2-2-2)

� End Pt Control Enab� Yes or No. End PointPressure Control allows the digital valve controllerto pull back from saturation of the pneumatic outputafter reaching the travel extreme. Rather thanhaving the instrument provide full supply pressure(saturation) continuously at the travel extreme, thedigital valve controller switches to an End PointPressure Control where the output pressure(pressure controller set point) to the actuator iscontrolled at a certain value. This value isconfigured through Pressure Set Point. Becausethe digital valve controller is constantly in controland not allowed to reach a dormant or saturatedstate, it is constantly testing its own pneumaticsystem. If there is an output pressure deviation, forexample, the instrument will issue an alert. Toassure there is an alert when an output pressuredeviation occurs, set up the alert as describedunder Pressure Deviation Alert.

� PST Start Pt�Defines the travel stop thevalve needs to be at before a partial stroke test canbe initiated. Also defines the travel stop for endpoint pressure control. Setting this value to NotConfigured will disable partial stroke tests and endpoint pressure control.

� Press Set Point� As part of End PointPressure Control, Pressure Set Point is the targetpressure the positioner controls to when the valveis at the travel stop defined by PST Start Point.Default values for Pressure Set Point aresummarized in table 5-7. When controllingpressure in the open position, Pressure Set Pointmust be set at a value that ensures the valve willremain open. When controlling pressure in theclosed position, Pressure Set Point must be set ata value that ensures the valve will remain closedand has enough force to maintain its rated shutoffclassification.

NoteEnd Point Pressure Control will be setautomatically during the Setup Wizard,or during the Auto Calibration Travelprocedure.

Refer to table 5-7 for guidelines for manuallysetting Pressure Set Point.

� Press Sat Time�Pressure Saturation Time isthe amount of time the digital valve controller staysin hard cutoff before switching to pressure control.Default is 45 seconds.

Input Char (1-2-2-3)Input Characterization defines the relationshipbetween the travel target and ranged set point.Ranged set point is the input to the characterizationfunction. If the zero power condition equals closed,then a set point of 0% corresponds to a ranged inputof 0%. If the zero power condition equals open, a setpoint of 0% corresponds to a ranged input of 100%.Travel target is the output from the characterizationfunction.

To select an input characterization, select Select InputChar from the Input Char menu. You can select fromthe three fixed input characteristics shown in figure 5-1or you can select a custom characteristic. Figure 5-1shows the relationship between the travel target andranged set point for the fixed input characteristics,assuming the Zero Power Condition is configured asclosed.

You can specify 21 points on a custom characteristiccurve. Each point defines a travel target, in % ofranged travel, for a corresponding set point, in % ofranged set point. Set point values range from −6.25%to 106.25%. Before modification, the customcharacteristic is linear.

5

DVC6000 SIS

May 20075-14

Trav

el T

arg

et, %

Ranged Set Point, %−25 0 125100

−25 0 125100

−25 0 125100

Input Characteristic = Linear

Input Characteristic = Equal Percentage

Input Characteristic = Quick Opening

100

0

−25

125

Trav

el T

arg

et, %

100

0

−25

125

Ranged Set Point, %

Trav

el T

arg

et, %

100

0

−25

125

Ranged Set Point, %

A6535-1/IL

Figure 5-1. Travel Target Versus Ranged Set Point, for VariousInput Characteristics (Zero Power Condition = Closed)

Define Custom Char (1-2-2-4)

To define a custom input characteristic, from the InputChar menu select Define Custom Char. Select thepoint you wish to define (1 to 21), then enter thedesired set point value. Press Enter then enter thedesired travel target for the corresponding set point.When finished, select point 0 to return to the InputChar menu.

With input characterization you can modify the overallcharacteristic of the valve and instrument combination.Selecting an equal percentage, quick opening, orcustom (other than the default of linear) inputcharacteristic modifies the overall valve andinstrument characteristic. However, if you select thelinear input characteristic, the overall valve andinstrument characteristic is the characteristic of thevalve, which is determined by the valve trim (i.e., theplug or cage).

Dynamic Response (1-2-2-5)

� SP Rate Open�Maximum rate (% of valve travelper second) at which the digital valve controller willmove to the open position regardless of the rate ofinput current change. A value of 0 will deactivate thisfeature and allow the valve to stroke open as fast aspossible.

� SP Rate Close�Maximum rate (% of valve travelper second) at which the digital valve controller willmove to the close position regardless of the rate ofinput current change. A value of 0 will deactivate thisfeature and allow the valve to stroke close as fast aspossible.

� Lag Time�Slows the response of the digitalvalve controller. A value ranging from 0.2 to 10.0 canbe used for noisy or fast processes to improve closedloop process control. Entering a value of 0.0 willdeactivate the lag filter.

Alerts (1-2-3)The following menus are available for configuringalerts and shutdowns. Items on the menus may bechanged with the instrument In Service. Protectiondoes not need to be removed (no need to set toNone). Alerts are not processed when a diagnostic isin progress. Select Configure / Setup, Detailed Setup,and Alerts. Follow the prompts on the FieldCommunicator display to configure the followingAlerts: Electronic Alerts, Sensor Alerts, EnvironmentAlerts, Travel Alerts, Travel History Alerts, SIS Alerts,and Alert Record.

5

Detailed Setup

May 2007 5-15

NoteThe Alerts section covers alerts andshutdowns. An alert, if enabled, canprovide information on operationaland performance issues. A shutdown,if enabled, will typically shut theinstrument down if there is a failureassociated with the enabled shutdown.

� Electronics Alerts (1-2-3-1)

� Drive Current Shutdown� Drive CurrentShutdown describes the status of I/P current;should the current fail, the digital valve controllerwill drive the output to its safe condition. DriveCurrent Shutdown is part of �Self Test shutdown�.Default is not enabled.

Drive Signal Alert (1-2-3-1-2)

Drive Signal Alert checks the drive signal andcalibrated travel. If one of the following conditionsexists for more than 20 seconds, the Drive SignalAlert is set.

For the case where Zero Power Condition isdefined as closed:

Drive Signal < 10% and Calibrated Travel > 3%

Drive Signal > 90% and Calibrated Travel < 97%

For the case where Zero Power Condition isdefined as open:

Drive Signal < 10% and Calibrated Travel < 97%

Drive Signal > 90% and Calibrated Travel > 3%

� Drive Signal Alert Enable�Yes or No. DriveSignal Alert Enable activates checking of therelationship between the Drive Signal and thecalibrated travel.

� Drive Signal�Shows the value of theinstrument drive signal in % (percent) of maximumdrive.

Processor Impaired Alerts (1-2-3-1-3)

� Offline/Failed Alrt Enab�If enabled, set whenthe device is in a failed state and not controlling theinput.

� Power Starvation Alrt Enab�When enabled,an alert is generated whenever power starvation isdetected. Default is not enabled.

� Non-Critical NVM Alrt Enab�When enabled,an alert is generated whenever there is a failureassociated with non-critical NVM (non-volatilememory). Default is not enabled.

� Critical NVM Shutdown�When enabled, theinstrument shuts down whenever there is a failureassociated with critical NVM (non-volatile memory).Default is not enabled.

� Flash ROM Shutdown�When enabled, theinstrument shuts down whenever there is a failureassociated with flash ROM (read only memory).Default is not enabled.

� No Free Time Shutdown�When enabled, theinstrument shuts down whenever there is a failureassociated with No Free Time. Default is notenabled.

� Reference Voltage Shutdown�Whenenabled, the instrument shuts down wheneverthere is a failure associated with the internalvoltage reference. Default is not enabled.

� Sensor Alerts (1-2-5-2)

� Tvl Sensor Shutdown

When enabled, the instrument shuts downwhenever there is a failure associated with thetravel sensor. Default is not enabled.

� Temp Sensor Shutdown

When enabled, the instrument shuts downwhenever there is a failure associated with thetemperature sensor. Default is not enabled.

� Press Sensor Shutdown

When enabled, the instrument shuts downwhenever there is a failure associated with thepressure sensor. Default is not enabled.

� Environment Alerts

Aux Terminal Alrt (1-2-3-3-1)

� Aux Terminal Alrt Enab�Yes or No. Whenenabled, the aux terminal acts as an alertactivation.

� Aux Input�The auxiliary input of the digitalvalve controller can be configured to be used indifferent ways. The default configuration allows apre-configured partial stroke test to be initiated byshorting the aux terminals together, such as withthe use of an appropriately connected localpushbutton switch. It can also be configured toenable an alert that will be generated when aswitch connected to the Aux terminals is either

5

DVC6000 SIS

May 20075-16

�open� or �closed�. The third configuration option isfor the Aux terminals to be used with the LCP100.In this configuration, the partial stroke test isinitiated using the LCP100, and the Aux Input alertis not available.

� Aux Term Mode�Aux terminal mode can beDisabled, Alert on Open or Close Contact, SISLocal Control Panel or Push Button Partial StrokeTest. If the LCP100 is not selected, the default isPartial Stroke Test. If the LCP100 is selectedduring Setup Wizard or enabled in Detailed Setupas Aux Terminal Mode − SIS Local Control Panel,the following parameters will be automatically setunder Travel Alerts:

Hi Hi / Lo Lo Enable − YESLo Lo Point (%) − 1Hi Hi Point (%) − 99DVC Power Up − Manual Reset

Supply Press Lo Alert (1-2-3-3-2)

� Supply Press Lo Alrt Enab�When enabled,the instrument shuts down whenever there is afailure associated with the supply pressure.

� Supply Press�Supply Pressure displays theinstrument supply pressure in psi, bar, kPa, orkg/cm2.

� Supply Press Lo Alrt Pt�Supply Pressure LoAlert Point. When the supply pressure falls belowthe supply pressure alert point, the supply pressurealert is active. To disable the supply pressure alert,set Supply Press Alrt Pt to zero.

� Travel Alerts (1-2-3-4)

� Travel�Travel displays the actual position ofthe valve in percent (%) of calibrated travel.

� Tvl Set Pt�Travel Set Point is the input to thecharacterization function.

� Tvl Alrt DB�Travel Alert Deadband is thetravel, in percent (%) of ranged travel, required toclear a travel alert, once it has been set. Thedeadband applies to both Travel Alert Hi/Lo andTravel Alert Hi Hi/Lo Lo. See figure 5-2.

Travel Deviation Alert (1-2-3-4-4)

If the difference between the travel target and theactual target exceeds the Travel Deviation AlertPoint for more than the Travel Deviation Time, theTravel Deviation Alert is set. It remains set until thedifference between the travel target and the actualtravel is less than the Travel Deviation Alert Pointminus the Travel Alert Deadband.

� Tvl Dev Alrt Enab�Travel Deviation AlertEnable, select Yes or No. When enabled, checksthe difference between the travel target and theactual travel.

� Tvl Dev Alrt Pt�Travel Deviation Alert Pointis the alert point for the difference, expressed inpercent (%), between the travel target and theactual travel. When the difference exceeds thealert point for more than the Travel Deviation Time,the Travel Deviation Alert is set. Default value is5%.

� Tvl Dev Time�Travel Deviation Time is thetime, in seconds, that the travel deviation mustexceed the Travel Deviation Alert Point before thealert is set. Default value is 10 seconds.

Travel Limit Alerts (1-2-3-4-5)

Travel Alert Hi Hi is set if the ranged travel risesabove the alert high point. Once the alert is set, theranged travel must fall below the alert high highpoint by the Travel Alert Deadband before the alertis cleared. See figure 5-2.

Travel Alert Lo Lo is set if the ranged travel fallsbelow the alert low low point. Once the alert is set,the ranged travel must rise above the alert low lowpoint by the Travel Alert Deadband before the alertis cleared.

� Tvl Alrt Hi Hi Enab�Yes or No. Travel AlertHi Hi Enable activates checking of the rangedtravel against the Travel Alert High-High points.

� Tvl Alrt Lo Lo Enab�Yes or No. Travel AlertLo Lo Enable activates checking of the rangedtravel against the Travel Alert Low-Low points.

� Tvl Alrt Hi Hi Pt�Travel Alert High-High Pointis the value of the travel, in percent (%) of rangedtravel, which, when exceeded, sets the Travel AlertHi Hi alert. When used with the LCP100 localcontrol panel this value is defaulted to 99% (< 99%travel, flashing light, > 99% travel, solid lights).

� Tvl Alrt Lo Lo Pt�Travel Alert Low-Low Pointis the value of the travel, in percent (%) of rangedtravel, which, when exceeded, sets the Travel AlertLo Lo alert. When used with the LCP100 localcontrol panel the value is set to 1%.

Travel Limit Hi/Lo Alerts (1-2-3-4-6)

Travel Alert Hi is set if the ranged travel risesabove the alert high point. Once the alert is set, theranged travel must fall below the alert high point bythe Travel Alert Deadband before the alert iscleared. See figure 5-2.

Travel Alert Lo is set if the ranged travel falls belowthe alert low point. Once the alert is set, the ranged

5

Detailed Setup

May 2007 5-17

ALERT IS CLEARED

ALERT IS SET

TRAVEL ALERTHIGH POINT

TRAVEL ALERTDEADBAND

A6532/IL Figure 5-2. Travel Alert Deadband

travel must rise above the alert low point by theTravel Alert Deadband before the alert is cleared.

� Tvl Alrt Hi Enab�Yes or No. Travel Alert HiEnable activates checking of the ranged travelagainst the Travel Alert High Point.

� Tvl Alrt Lo Enab�Yes or No. Travel Alert LoEnable activates checking of the ranged travelagainst the Travel Alert Lo Point.

� Tvl Alrt Hi Point�Travel Alert High Point isthe value of the travel, in percent (%) of rangedtravel, which, when exceeded, sets the Travel AlertHigh alert.

� Tvl Alrt Lo Point�Travel Alert Low Point isthe value of the travel, in percent (%) of rangedtravel, which, when exceeded, sets the Travel AlertLow alert.

Travel Limit / Cutoff Alerts (1-2-3-4-7)

� Tvl Limit/Cutoff Hi Alrt Enab�Yes or No.Travel Limit /Cutoff Hi Alert Enable activates theTravel Limit /Cutoff Hi alert.

� Tvl Limit/Cutoff Lo Alrt Enab�Yes or No.Travel Limit /Cutoff Lo Alert Enable activates theTravel Limit/Cutoff Lo alert.

� Tvl/Press Cut Hi�Travel Cutoff Hi defines thehigh cutoff point for the travel in percent(%) ofpre-characterized set point.

� Tvl/Press Cut Lo�Travel Cutoff Lo definesthe low cutoff point for the travel in percent (%)ofpre-characterized set point.

� Travel History Alerts

Cycle Count (1-2-3-5-1)

� Cycle Count Alrt Enab�Yes or No. CycleCounter Alert Enable activates checking of the

Deadband Reference

Deadband (+/− 5%)

Deadband exceeded, and directionchanged, new Reference Pointestablished

Point

Point at whichcycle is counted.

A6533-1/IL

Figure 5-3. Cycle Counter Deadband (set at 10%)

difference between the Cycle Counter and theCycle Counter Alert point. The Cycle Counter Alertis set when the value exceeds the Cycle CounterAlert point. It is cleared after you reset the CycleCounter to a value less than the alert point.

� Cycle Count�Cycle Counter records thenumber of times the travel changes direction. Thechange in direction must occur after the deadbandhas been exceeded before it can be counted as acycle. See figure 5-3. You can reset the CycleCounter by configuring it as zero.

� Cycle Count Alrt Pt�Cycle Counter AlertPoint is the value of the Cycle Counter, in cycles,which, when exceeded, sets the Cycle CounterAlert.

Cycle Count/Tvl Accum Deadband (1-2-3-5-2)

� Deadband

Cycle Counter Deadband is the area around thetravel reference point, in percent (%) of rangedtravel, that was established at the last increment ofthe Cycle Counter. This area must be exceededbefore a change in travel direction can be countedas a cycle. See figure 5-3.

Travel Accumulator Deadband is the area aroundthe travel reference point, in percent (%) of rangedtravel, that was established at the last increment ofthe accumulator. This area must be exceededbefore a change in travel can be accumulated. Seefigure 5-4.

Tvl Accum (1-2-3-5-3)

� Tvl Accum Alrt Enab�Yes or No. TravelAccumulation Alert Enable activates checking ofthe difference between the Travel Accumulatorvalue and the Travel Accumulator Alert Point. The

5

DVC6000 SIS

May 20075-18

Deadband Reference

Deadband (+/− 5%)

Deadband exceeded,new Reference Pointestablished

Point

This amount of change isadded to the TravelAccumulator.

A6534/IL

Figure 5-4. Travel Accumulator Deadband (set at 10%)

Travel Accumulation Alert is set when the TravelAccumulator value exceeds the Travel AccumulatorAlert Point. It is cleared after you reset the TravelAccumulation to a value less than the alert point.

� Tvl Accum�Travel Accumulator records thetotal change in travel, in percent (%) of rangedtravel, since the accumulator was last cleared. Thevalue of the Travel Accumulator increments whenthe magnitude of the change exceeds the TravelAccumulator Deadband. See figure 5-4. You canreset the Travel Accumulator by configuring it tozero.

� Tvl Accum Alrt Pt�Travel Accumulator AlertPoint is the value of the Travel Accumulator, inpercent (%) of ranged travel, which, whenexceeded, sets the Travel Accumulator Alert.

� SIS Alerts (1-2-3-6)

� PST Press Limit�Partial Stroke PressureLimit defines the output pressure that will cause thepartial stroke test to stop. For actuators that ventfrom the test starting point, the pressure limit willbe a minimum value. For actuators that fill from thetest starting point, the pressure will be a maximumvalue.

� Press Dev Alrt Enab�Pressure DeviationAlert Enable, select Yes or No. This alert notifies amonitoring system when a deviation in the actuatorpressure has occurred. This is used when theinstrument is controlling via pressure (PressureControl Mode is enabled) to the actuator (ratherthan valve position) to prevent saturation of thepneumatic output. When enabled, this alert checksthe difference between the target pressure and theactual pressure. If the difference exceeds the

Pressure Deviation Alert Point for more than thepressure deviation time, the Pressure DeviationAlert is set. It remains set until the differencebetween the target pressure and the actualpressure is less than the Pressure Deviation AlertPoint. The pressure deviation alert point anddeviation alert time are configurable and can bedisabled altogether.

� Press Dev Alrt Pt�Pressure Deviation AlertPoint is the alert point for the difference betweenthe pressure target and the actual pressure. Whenthe difference exceeds the alert point for more thanthe Pressure Deviation Time, the PressureDeviation Alert is set. After completion of the SetupWizard or Auto Travel calibration a default value of2 psi is set. This will generate an alert when theactuator pressure is not within �2 psi of the targetpressure.

� Press Dev Time�Pressure Deviation Time isthe time, in seconds, that the pressure deviationmust exceed the Pressure Deviation Alert Pointbefore the alert is set. The Pressure DeviationTime is set to 30 seconds by default.

� Alert Record (1-2-3-7)

To be recorded, an alert must both be enabled forreporting, and the group in which it resides must be

enabled for recording. Table 5-8 lists the alertsincluded in each of the groups. When any alert froman enabled group becomes active, active alerts in allenabled groups are stored.

� Alrt Record Not Empty Enab�Yes or No.When enabled indicates when an alert has beenrecorded.

� Alrt Record Full Enab�Yes or No. Whenenabled indicates when the Alert Event Record isfull.

� Display Record�Displays all recorded alertsand the date and time the alerts were recorded.

� Clear Record�Clears the alert record. Toclear the alert record, all alerts in enabled groupsmust be inactive.

Alert Groups (1-2-3-7-5)

� Failure Group Enab�Permits enabling theFailure Alert group. Table 5-8 lists the alertsincluded in each of the groups.

5

Detailed Setup

May 2007 5-19

Table 5-8. Alerts Included in Alert Groups for Alert RecordAlert Group Alerts Include in Group

Valve Alerts

Travel Lo AlertTravel Hi AlertTravel Lo Lo AlertTravel Hi Hi AlertTravel Deviation AlertDrive Signal Alert

Failure Alerts

Flash ROM FailNo Free TimeReference Voltage FailDrive Current FailCritical NVM FailTemperature Sensor FailPressure Sensor FailTravel Sensor Fail

Miscellaneous Alerts Auxiliary input

� Valve Group Enab�Permits enabling theValve Alert group. Table 5-8 lists the alertsincluded in each of the groups.

� Misc Group Enab�Permits enabling theMiscellaneous Alert group. Table 5-8 lists the alertsincluded in each of the groups.

Status (1-2-4)Select Configure / Setup, Detailed Setup, and Status.Follow the prompts on the Field Communicator displayto configure the following parameters: InstrumentTime, Calibration and Diagnostics, Operational, andIntegrator.

� Instrument Time (1-2-4-1)

� Inst Time Invalid Enab�Yes or No. Whenenabled indicates when the Instrument Time Invalidalert is active.

� Inst Date and Time�Permits setting theinstrument clock. When alerts are stored in thealert record, the date and time (obtained from theinstrument clock) that they were stored is alsostored in the record. The instrument clock uses a24-hour format.

� Calibrations & Diagnostics (1-2-4-2)

� Cal in Progress Enab�Yes or No. Whenenabled indicates that calibration is in progress.

� AutoCal in Progress Enab�Yes or No. Whenenabled indicates that auto calibration is inprogress.

� Diag in Progress Enab�Yes or No. Whenenabled indicates that a diagnostic test is inprogress.

� Diag Data Avail Enab�Yes or No. Whenenabled indicates when there is diagnostic dataavailable.

� Operational (1-2-4-3)

� Press Ctrl Active Enab�Yes or No. Whenenabled indicates when Pressure Control is active.

� Multi-Drop Enab�Yes or No. When enabledindicates the digital valve controller is operating in amulti-drop loop.

� Integrator (1-2-4-4)

� Integrator Sat Hi Enab�Yes or No. Whenenabled indicates when the Integrator SaturatedHigh alert is active.

� Integrator Sat Lo Enab�Yes or No. Whenenabled indicates when the Integrator Saturated Loalert is active.

� Integ Limit�The Integral Limit provides anupper limit to the integrator output. The high limit isconfigurable from 0 to 100% of the I/P drive signal.

� Integ DeadZ�Integral Dead Zone is a windowaround the Primary Setpoint in which integralaction is disabled. This feature is used to eliminatefriction induced limit cycles around the PrimarySetpoint when the integrator is active. The DeadZone is configurable from 0% to 2%, correspondingto a symmetric window from 0% to +/−2% aroundthe Primary Setpoint. Default value is 0.25%.

Instrument (1-2-5)Select Configure / Setup, Detailed Setup, andInstrument. Follow the prompts on the FieldCommunicator display to configure the followingInstrument parameters: General, Units, Analog InputRange, Relay Type, Zero Pwr Condition (Zero PowerCondition), Max Supply Press (Maximum SupplyPressure), Aux Term Mode (Auxiliary Terminal Mode)Inst Date and Time (Instrument Date and Time), andCalib Status and Loc (Calibration Status andLocation).

� General (1-2-5-1)

� HART Tag�Enter an up to 8 character HARTtag for the instrument. The HART tag is the easiestway to distinguish between instruments in amulti-instrument environment. Use the HART tag tolabel instruments electronically according to therequirements of your application. The tag youassign is automatically displayed when the FieldCommunicator establishes contact with the digitalvalve controller at power-up.

5

DVC6000 SIS

May 20075-20

� Message�Enter any message with up to 32characters. Message provides the most specificuser-defined means for identifying individualinstruments in multi-instrument environments.

� Descriptor�Enter a descriptor for theapplication with up to 16 characters. The descriptorprovides a longer user-defined electronic label toassist with more specific instrument identificationthan is available with the HART tag.

� Date�Enter a date with the formatMM/DD/YY. Date is a user-defined variable thatprovides a place to save the date of the lastrevision of configuration or calibration information.

� Valve Serial Num�Enter the serial numberfor the valve in the application with up to 12characters.

� Inst Serial Num�Enter the serial number onthe instrument nameplate, up to 12 characters.

� Polling Address�If the digital valve controlleris used in point-to-point operation, the PollingAddress is 0. When several devices are connectedin the same loop, such as for split ranging, eachdevice must be assigned a unique polling address.The Polling Address is set to a value between 0and 15. To change the polling address theinstrument must be Out Of Service.

For the Field Communicator to be able tocommunicate with a device whose polling addressis not 0, it must be configured to automaticallysearch for all or specific connected devices. Forinformation on configuring the Field Communicatorfor automatic polling, see the Model 375 FieldCommunicator Basics section.

� Units (1-2-5-2)

� Pressure Units�Defines the output andsupply pressure units in either psi, bar, kPa, orkg/cm2.

� Temp Units�Degrees Fahrenheit or Celsius.The temperature measured is from a sensormounted on the digital valve controller�s printedwiring board.

� Analog In Units�Permits defining the AnalogInput Units in mA or percent of 4−20 mA range.Only for instruments in a 4−20 or 0−20 mAinstallation (point-to-point operation).

TRAVELRANGEHIGH

TRAVELRANGELOW

THE SHAPE OFTHESE LINES DEPENDS ON

THE INPUT CHARACTERISTICSLINEAR CHARACTERISTIC SHOWN

INPUT RANGE LOW

INPUT RANGE HIGH

ANALOG INPUTmA OR % OF 4-20 mA

CA

LIB

RA

TE

D T

RA

VE

L, %

A6531-1 / IL

Figure 5-5. Calibrated Travel to Analog Input Relationship

ZPC = CLOSED

ZPC = OPEN

NOTE:ZPC = ZERO POWER CONDITION

� Analog Input Range (1-2-5-3)

� Input Range Hi�Permits setting the InputRange High value. Input Range High shouldcorrespond to Travel Range High, if the ZeroPower Condition is configured as closed. If theZero Power Condition is configured as open, InputRange High corresponds to Travel Range Low.See figure 5-5.

� Input Range Lo�Permits setting the InputRange Low value. Input Range Low shouldcorrespond to Travel Range Low, if the Zero PowerCondition is configured as closed. If the ZeroPower Condition is configured as open, InputRange Low corresponds to Travel Range High.See figure 5-5.

� Relay Type

There are three basic categories of relays that result invarious combinations from which to select.

Relay Type: The relay type is printed on the labelaffixed to the relay body. A = double-acting; B = single-acting, reverse; C= single-acting, direct.

Special App: This is used only in single-actingapplications where the �unused� output port isconfigured to read the pressure downstream of asolenoid valve. See page 2-14 for additionalinformation.

Lo Bleed: The label affixed to the relay bodyindicates it is a low bleed version (default for SIS tier).

5

Detailed Setup

May 2007 5-21

Figure 5-6. Feedback Connection for Typical Sliding-StemActuator (Up to 4-inch Travel)

ACTUATORSTEM TRAVEL SENSOR SHAFT

FEEDBACK ARM

CONNECTOR ARM

ADJUSTMENT ARM

� Zero Pwr Cond

Identifies whether the valve is open or closed wheninstrument power is lost. If you are unsure how to setthis parameter, disconnect the segment loop power tothe instrument. The resulting valve travel is the ZeroPower Condition.

� Max Supply Press

Enter the maximum supply pressure in psi, bar, kPa,or kg/cm2, depending on what was selected forpressure units.

� Aux Term Mode

The auxiliary terminal mode selections are Disabled,Alert on Open or Close Contact, SIS Local ControlPanel or Push Button Partial Stroke Test. If theLCP100 is not selected, the default is Partial StrokeTest. If the LCP100 is selected during Setup Wizard orenabled in Detailed Setup as Aux Terminal Mode −SIS Local Control Panel, the following parameters willbe automatically set under Travel Alerts:

Hi Hi / Lo Lo Enable − YESLo Lo Point (%) − 1Hi Hi Point (%) − 99DVC Power Up − Manual Reset

� Inst Date and Time

Date is a user-defined variable that provides a place tosave the date of the last revision of configuration orcalibration information.

Figure 5-7. Feedback Connection for Typical Long-StrokeSliding-Stem Actuator (4 to 24-Inches Travel)

CAM

ROLLER

29B1665-A / DOC

STEM CONNECTOR

� Calib Status and Loc (1-2-5-9)

� Last Calib Status�Indicates the status of thelast instrument calibration.

� Calib Loc�Indicates the location of the lastinstrument calibration.

Valve & Actuator (1-2-6)Select Configure / Setup, Detailed Setup, and Valve &Actuator. Follow the prompts on the FieldCommunicator display to configure the followinginstrument parameters: Manufacturer, Valve SerialNum (Valve Serial Number), Valve Style, ActuatorStyle, Feedback Conn (Feedback Connection), andTvl Sensor Motion (Travel Sensor Motion).

� Manufacturer

Enter the manufacturer of the actuator on which theinstrument is mounted. If the actuator manufacturer isnot listed, select Other.

� Valve Serial Num

Enter the serial number for the valve in the applicationwith up to 12 characters.

5

DVC6000 SIS

May 20075-22

� Valve Style

Enter the valve style, rotary or sliding-stem.

� Actuator Style

Enter the actuator style, spring and diaphragm, pistondouble-acting without spring, piston single-acting withspring, or piston double-acting with spring.

� Feedback Conn

Select Rotary All, SStem - Roller or SStem - Standard.For rotary valves, enter Rotary - All, SStem - Roller.

For sliding-stem valves, if the feedback linkageconsists of a connector arm, adjustment arm, andfeedback arm (similar to figure 5-6), enter SStem -Standard. If the feedback linkage consists of a rollerthat follows a cam (similar to figure 5-7), enter RotaryAll, SStem - Roller.

� Tvl Sensor Motion

Select Clockwise, or Counterclockwise. Travel SensorMotion establishes the proper travel sensor rotation.Determine the rotation by viewing the end of the travelsensor shaft from the perspective of the actuator.

For instruments with Relay Type A and C: Ifincreasing air pressure at output A causes the shaft toturn clockwise, enter Clockwise. If it causes the shaftto turn counterclockwise, enter Counterclockwise.

For instruments with Relay Type B: If increasing airpressure at output B causes the shaft to turncounterclockwise, enter Clockwise. If it causes theshaft to turn clockwise, enter Counterclockwise.

SIS/Partial Stroke (1-2-7)� PST Enable

Yes or No. Enables or disables the Partial Stroke Test.

� PST Vars View/Edit

Follow the prompts on the Field Communicator displayto enter or view information for following PSTVariables: Max Travel Movement (Maximum TravelMovement), Stroke Speed, Pause Time, PST PressLimit (Partial Stroke Pressure Limit), PST ModeEnable (Partial Stroke Enable), Pressure Set Point(Pressure Set Point), and End Pt Contrl Enab (EndPoint Control Enable). For more information on thepartial stroke test see Partial Stroke Test in Section 7.

Max Travel Movement�Defines the maximumdisplacement of partial stroke test signal from thetravel stop. Default value is 10%. It may be set to avalue between 1 and 30% in 0.1% increments.

NoteThe Max Travel Movement is thepercentage of total span that the valvemoves away from its operating statetowards its fail state during a PartialStroke Test.

Stroke Speed�The stroke speed can be set for1%/second, 0.5%/second, 0.25%/second,0.12%/second, or 0.06%/second. The default value forPartial Stroke Speed is 0.25%/second. For large sizeactuators set the stroke speed to 0.06%/second.

Pause Time�The Setup Wizard sets the PartialStroke Pause Time to 5 seconds. This is the pausetime between the up and down strokes of the test. Itcan be set for 5, 10, 15, 20 or 30 seconds.

PST Press Limit (single acting actuators)�During theSetup Wizard or Auto Travel Calibration, the PartialStroke Pressure Limit will be set to a positive value forsingle acting actuators. For those actuators that ventfrom the test starting point, the pressure limit will be aminimum value. For those actuators that fill from thetest starting point, the pressure limit will be amaximum value. The pressure signal used for thisthreshold depends on relay type and is summarizedbelow.

Relay Type Pressure Signal

A or C Port A − Port BB Port B − Port AB Special App. Port BC Special App. Port A

PST Press Limit (double acting actuators)� Duringthe Setup Wizard or Auto Travel Calibration, the PSTPress Limit will be set to a negative value for actuatorswhere the Partial Stroke Start Point is opposite of theZero Power Condition (e.g., Partial Stroke Start Point= Open and Zero Power Condition = Closed) and to apositive valve for actuators where the Partial StrokeStart Point is the same as the Zero Power Condition.

5

Detailed Setup

May 2007 5-23

Figure 5-8. Time Series Plots of Travel Set Point, Travel, Error, and Actuator Pressure for a Typical Emergency Shutdown Valve

Manual SIS / Partial Stroke ParameterConfiguration

NoteIn order to manually set the partialstroke pressure limit with the correctvalue, you must be able to run a valvesignature test using AMS ValveLinkSoftware (see figure 5-8). It is thenpossible to set the partial strokepressure limit with the FieldCommunicator, using the informationgenerated by the valve signature test.

Thresholds for detecting a stuck valve areautomatically configured when the Setup Wizard orPartial Stroke Calibration routines are run. Howeverthresholds can also be configured manually. Tomanually configure thresholds, disable the travel

Table 5-9. Values for Disabling Partial Stroke Pressure Limit

ActuatorType

Relay TypeZero

PowerCondition

PartialStroke

Start Point

PartialStroke

PressureLimit

(Disabled)

SingleActing

A or C

ClosedOpen 0.0

Closed Psupply

OpenOpen Psupply

Closed 0.0

B

ClosedOpen Psupply

Closed 0.0

OpenOpen 0.0

Closed Psupply

DoubleActing A

ClosedOpen −Psupply

Closed Psupply

OpenOpen Psupply

Closed −Psupply

deviation alert by setting Travel Dev Alert Pt to 125%(1-2-3-4-4-2). Also disable end point pressure control(1-2-2-2-2-1) and disable the partial stroke pressurelimit (1-2-7-2) by setting the values shown in table 5-9.

5

ACTUAL TRACE FROM TEST (TYPICAL)



DVC6000 SIS

May 20075-24

Table 5-10. Estimates for Partial Stroke Pressure Limits

Actuator Style Relay Type Zero PowerCondition

PST Starting Point Partial Stroke Pressure Limit

Spring andDiaphragm

A or C

ClosedOpen Pmin − 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)

Closed Pmax + 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)

OpenOpen Pmax + 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)

Closed Pmin − 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)

B

ClosedOpen Pmax + 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)

Closed Pmin − 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)

OpenOpen Pmin − 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)

Closed Pmax + 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)

Single Acting Piston

A or C

ClosedOpen 0.5 * Pmin

Closed Pmax + 0.5 * (Psupply − Pmax)

OpenOpen Pmax + 0.5 * (Psupply − Pmax)

Closed 0.5 * Pmin

B

ClosedOpen Pmax + 0.5 * (Psupply − Pmax)

Closed 0.5 * Pmin

OpenOpen 0.5 * Pmin


Double Acting Piston A

ClosedOpen Pmin − 0.5 * (Psupply + Pmin)


OpenOpen Pmax + 0.5 * (Psupply − Pmax)

Closed Pmin − 0.5 * (Psupply + Pmin)

Run the partial stroke test using the 375 FieldCommunicator. Once the test is completed, downloadthe partial stroke test results using AMS ValveLinkSoftware.

On the partial stroke graph page, select theTvl(%)/Time radio button to plot travel set point andtravel time series traces. The Travel Deviation AlertPoint should be set at least 1.5 times the maximumdeviation obtained from the time series plot. MaximumTravel Movement should be set at least 5% above theTravel Deviation Alert Point.

On the partial stroke graph page, select thePress/Time radio button to plot the pressure trace. Ifthe actuator pressure starts high and moves low, findthe minimum actuator pressure. If the actuatorpressure starts low and moves high, find the maximumactuator pressure. Use table 5-10 to estimate thepartial stroke pressure limit.

In the example shown in the middle graph of figure5-8, the maximum travel deviation between travel setpoint and travel is approximately 4%. Travel DeviationAlert Point should be set to 1.5 x 4% = 6%. MaxTravel Movement should be set at 6% + 5% = 11%.

In the bottom graph of figure 5-8, with a single actingpiston actuator, fail closed, Relay A, and supplypressure at 52 psig (read from instrument gauge),Partial Stroke Pressure Limit is the minimum actuatorpressure attained during the test, i.e., 24 psig. Set thePartial Stroke Pressure Limit to 0.5 * Pmin = 12 psig.

The default value is 0.

For double acting valves, the differential pressure isused.

� Auto Test Interval

An interval of time (in days) between partial stroketests that are automatically run by the digital valvecontroller, subject to the device being powered up. Avalue of 0 disables this feature.

� DVC Power Up

Defines the power up behavior of the DVC6000. AutoReset allows the valve to track the command signalwhen power is applied to the device. Manual Reset willlock the device in its safety position until the digitalvalve controller is reset.

If Manual Reset is selected, its state can bedetermined from the status monitor by monitoring theLocked In Safety Position alert.

When Aux Terminal Mode is set to SIS Local ControlPanel (LP100), DVC Power Up is set to Manual Resetand cannot be changed to Auto Reset.

The reset signal depends on how the aux terminalsare configured. If configured for SIS Local ControlPanel, the digital valve controller can be reset bypressing the button next to the green light on theLCP100. If configured as Push Button Partial Stroke,the digital valve controller can be reset by shorting theaux terminals for more than 3 seconds but less than10 seconds. The device cannot be reset from the auxterminals if they are configured otherwise.

5

Detailed Setup

May 2007 5-25

Valve Stuck Alert

CAUTION

If a valve stuck alert is active, theremay be potential energy stored in thevalve and actuator assembly. Suddenrelease of this energy may cause thevalve to suddenly open or close,resulting in equipment damage.

While performing the partial stroke test, even if thevalve sticks, the digital valve controller will not fullyexhaust or fill the actuator pressure in its attempt tocomplete the partial stroke. Rather, the instrument will

abort the test and issue an alert. It is recommendedthat the Travel Deviation alert be enabled andconfigured.

The Valve Stuck alert will be generated either by theTravel Deviation alert (the difference betweenexpected and actual travel exceeds the level definedin the deviation alert), or if the actuator pressurereaches the Partial Stroke pressure limit. If the TravelDeviation alert is not configured, then the PartialStroke pressure limit will abort the test and cause theValve Stuck alert.

If the valve is stuck and only the Travel Deviation alertis enabled (without specifying partial stroke pressurelimit) the Valve Stuck alert will still be generated andthe test will be aborted.

5

DVC6000 SIS

May 20075-26

5

Calibration

May 2007 6-1

6-6

Section 6 Calibration

Calibration Overview 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Travel Calibration 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Auto Travel Calibrate 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manual Travel Calibrate 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Calibration AdjustDigital Calibration Adjust

Sensor Calibration 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pressure Sensor Calibration 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Pressure Sensor CalibrationSupply Pressure Sensor Calibration

Travel Sensor Adjust 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVC6010 and DVC6030 Digital Valve ControllersDVC6020 Digital Valve Controllers

Analog Input Calibration 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Relay Adjustment 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Double-Acting Relay 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Single-Acting Relays 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single-Acting DirectSingle-Acting Reverse

Restore Factory Settings 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PST Calibration 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

DVC6000 SIS

May 20076-2

Calibration Overview When a DVC6000 Series digital valve controller isordered as part of a control valve assembly, thefactory mounts the digital valve controller on theactuator and connects the necessary tubing, then setsup and calibrates the controller.

For digital valve controllers that are orderedseparately, recalibration of the analog input orpressure sensors generally is unnecessary. However,after mounting on an actuator, perform the initial setup(either auto or manual), then calibrate travel byselecting Calibrate, Travel Calibration, and Auto TvlCalib (Auto Travel Calibration) from the Configure /Setup menu. For more detailed calibration information,refer to the following calibration procedures, availablefrom the Calibrate menu:

Travel Calibration

� Auto Travel Calibrate �This procedureautomatically calibrates the travel. The calibrationprocedure uses the valve and actuator stops as the0% and 100% calibration points.

� Manual Travel Calibrate �This procedurepermits manual calibration of the travel. Thiscalibration procedure allows you to determine the 0%and 100% calibration points and obtain the optimumlinearity on a sliding-stem valve.

Sensor Calibration

� Pressure Sensor Calibration�This procedurepermits calibrating the three pressure sensors.Normally the sensors are calibrated at the factory andshould not need calibration.

� Travel Sensor Adjust�This procedure permitscalibrating the travel sensor. Normally the travelsensor is calibrated at the factory. Calibrating thetravel sensor should only be necessary if the travelsensor is replaced.

� Analog In Calibration�This procedure permitscalibrating the analog input sensor. Normally thesensor is calibrated at the factory and should not needcalibration.

NoteAnalog Input is only available whenthe DVC6000 SIS is operating inPoint-to-Point mode with 4−20 mA or0−20 mA current.

Relay Adjustment�This procedure permitsadjustment of the pneumatic relay.

Restore Factory Settings�This procedure permitsyou to restore the calibration settings back to thefactory settings.

PST Calibration�This procedure permits you to runthe PST calibration procedure.

To display the calibrate menu, from the Online menu,select Configure / Setup and Calibrate.

NoteThe Instrument Mode must be Out OfService and the Protection set to Nonebefore the instrument can be calibrated.

If you are operating in burst mode, werecommend that you disable burst beforecontinuing calibration. Once calibration iscomplete, burst mode may then be turnedback on.

WARNING

During calibration, the valve maymove. To avoid personal injury andproperty damage caused by therelease of pressure or process fluid,provide some temporary means ofcontrol for the process.

Travel Calibration There are two procedures available for calibratingtravel:

� Automatically (Auto Tvl Calib)

� Manually (Man Tvl Calib)

6

Calibration

May 2007 6-3

Auto Travel Calibrate (1-3-1-1) User interaction is only required with Auto CalibrateTravel when the feedback connection is SStem -Standard (Sliding Stem - Standard). A feedbackconnection of Rotary - All, SStem - Roller (SlidingStem - Roller) requires no user interaction and youcan start with step 6.

For a SStem - Standard feedback connection,interaction provides a more accurate crossoveradjustment. Setting crossover establishes the zerodegree point for the geometric correction used totranslate the rotary motion observed by the travelsensor into the linear motion of the sliding-stem valve.

When a double-acting actuator is used, you will beprompted to run the Relay Adjustment when AutoTravel Calibration is selected. Select Yes to adjust therelay. Select No to proceed with Auto TravelCalibration. For additional information, refer to RelayAdjustment in this section.

Select Auto Tvl Calib from the Calibrate menu, thenfollow the prompts on the Field Communicator displayto automatically calibrate travel.

1. Select the method of crossover adjustment:manual, last value, or default. Manual is therecommended choice. If you select Manual, the FieldCommunicator will prompt you to adjust the crossoverin step 3.

If you select Last Value, the crossover settingcurrently stored in the instrument is used and thereare no further user interactions with theauto-calibration routine (go to step 6). Use thisselection if you cannot use manual, such as when youcannot see the valve.

If you select Default, an approximate value for thecrossover is written to the instrument and there are nofurther user interactions with the auto-calibrationroutine (go to step 6). Use this selection only as a lastresort. Default assumes a midrange position on thetravel sensor as the crossover point, however, thismay not be an appropriate value to use for crossoverbecause of variations in mounting and travel sensorcalibration.

2. The instrument seeks the high and low drive pointsand the minor loop feedback (MLFB) and output bias.No user interaction is required in this step. For adescription of these actions see step 6.

3. If you select Manual in step 1, you are asked toselect an adjustment source, either analog or digital. Ifyou use a current source to adjust the crossover,select Analog and go to step 4. If you wish to adjustthe current source digitally, select Digital and go tostep 5.

Figure 6-1. Crossover Point

ACTUATORSTEM

FEEDBACK ARM

90�

A6536−3 / IL

NoteThe analog option is not availablewhen the DVC6000 SIS is operated by0−24 VDC in Multidrop mode.

4. If you selected Analog as the crossover adjustmentsource, the Field Communicator prompts you to adjustthe current source until the feedback arm is 90° to theactuator stem, as shown in figure 6-1. After you havemade the adjustment, press OK and go to step 6.

5. If you selected Digital as the crossover adjustmentsource, the Field Communicator displays a menu toallow you to adjust the crossover.

Select the direction and size of change required to setthe feedback arm so it is 90° to the actuator stem, asshown in figure 6-1. Selecting large, medium, andsmall adjustments to the crossover causes changes ofapproximately 10.0°, 1.0°, and 0.1°, respectively, tothe rotation of the feedback arm.

If another adjustment is required, repeat step 5.Otherwise, select Done and go to step 6.

6. The remainder of the auto calibration procedure isautomatic.

During calibration, the instrument seeks the high andlow end points and the minor loop feedback (MLFB)

6

DVC6000 SIS

May 20076-4

and output bias. By searching for the end points, theinstrument establishes the limits of physical travel, i.e.,the actual travel 0 and 100% positions. This alsodetermines how far the relay beam swings to calibratethe sensitivity of the beam position sensor.

Adjusting the minor loop feedback bias is done aroundmid travel. The valve position is briefly moved backand forth to determine the relay beam position atquiescence. Essentially, it establishes the zero pointfor the Minor Loop Feedback circuit. The back andforth motion is performed to account for hysteresis.

Adjusting the output bias aligns the travel set pointwith the actual travel by computing the drive signalrequired to produce 0% error. This is done while thevalve is at 50% travel, making very small adjustments.Calibration is complete when the �Auto Calibration hascompleted� message appears.

7. Place the instrument In Service and verify that thetravel properly tracks the current source.

If the unit does not calibrate, refer to table 6-1 for errormessages and possible remedies.

Manual Travel Calibrate (1-3-1-2) It is recommended that you adjust the relay beforemanually calibrating travel. For additional informationrefer to Relay Adjustment in this section.

NoteRelay Adjustment is only available forthe double-acting relay (Relay A).

Two procedures are available to manually calibratetravel:

� Analog Adjust

� Digital Adjust

Analog Calibration Adjust

NoteAnalog Calibration Adjust is onlyavailable in 4−20 mA or 0−20 mAsystems (point-to-point operation).

Table 6-1. Auto Calibrate Travel Error Messages Error Message Possible Problem and Remedy

Input current mustexceed 3.8 mA forcalibration.

The analog input signal to the instrumentmust be greater than 3.8 mA. Adjust thecurrent output from the control system or thecurrent source to provide at least 4.0 mA.

Place Out Of Serviceand ensure CalibrateProtection is disabledbefore calib.

The Instrument Mode must be Out of Serviceand the Protection must be None before theinstrument can be calibrated. For informationon changing instrument protection and mode,see the beginning of this section.

Calibration Aborted.An end point was notreached.

The problem may be one or the other of thefollowing:1. The tuning set selected is too low and thevalve does not reach an end point in theallotted time. Press the Hot Key, selectStabilize/Optimize then Increase Response(selects next higher tuning set).2. The tuning set selected is too high, valveoperation is unstable and does not stay at anend point for the allotted time. Press the HotKey, select Stabilize/Optimize then DecreaseResponse (selects next lower tuning set).

Invalid travel value.Check travel sensorand feedback armadjustments, and instsupply press. Then,repeat Auto Calib.

Prior to receiving this message, did theinstrument output go from zero to full supply?If not, verify instrument supply pressure byreferring to the specifications in theappropriate actuator instruction manual. Ifsupply pressure is correct, check instrumentpneumatic components (I/P converter andrelay).

If the instrument output did go from zero tofull supply prior to receiving this message,then verify proper mounting by referring to theappropriate mounting procedure in theInstallation section.Verify travel sensor adjustment by performingthe appropriate Travel Sensor Adjustprocedure in the Calibration section.Making the crossover adjustment with thevalve positioned at either end of its travel willalso cause this message to appear.

From the Calibrate menu, select Man Tvl Calib andAnalog Adjust. Connect a variable current source tothe instrument LOOP + and LOOP − terminals. Thecurrent source should be capable of generating 4 to 20mA. Follow the prompts on the Field Communicatordisplay to calibrate the instrument�s travel in percent.

Note0% Travel = Valve Closed100% Travel = Valve Open

1. Adjust the input current until the valve is nearmid-travel. Press OK.

2. If the feedback connection is Rotary - All, SStem -Roller, go to step 6. If the feedback connection is

6

Calibration

May 2007 6-5

SStem - Standard, you are prompted to set thecrossover point. Adjust the current source until thefeedback arm is 90° to the actuator stem, as shown infigure 6-1. Then press OK.

NoteIn steps 3 through 7, the accuracy ofthe current source adjustment affectsthe position accuracy.

3. Adjust the current source until the valve is at 0%travel, then press OK.





8. Adjust the current source until the valve is near 5%travel, then press OK.

9. Adjust the current source until the valve is near95% travel, then press OK.


Digital Calibration AdjustFrom the Calibrate menu, select Man Tvl Calib andDigital Adjust. Connect a variable current source to theinstrument LOOP + and LOOP − terminals. Thecurrent source should be set between 4 and 20 mA.Follow the prompts on the Field Communicator displayto calibrate the instrument�s travel in percent.

Note0% Travel = Valve Closed100% Travel = Valve Open

1. From the adjustment menu, select the direction andsize of change required to adjust the output until thevalve is near mid-travel. Selecting large, medium, andsmall adjustments causes changes of approximately

10.0°, 1.0°, and 0.1°, respectively, to the feedbackarm rotation.


2. If the feedback connection is Rotary - All, SStem -Roller, go to step 7. If the feedback connection isSStem - Standard, adjust the feedback arm to thecrossover point by using the adjustment menu.

3. From the adjustment menu, select the direction andsize of change required to set the feedback arm so itis 90° to the actuator stem, as shown in figure 6-1.Selecting large, medium, and small adjustments to thecrossover causes changes of approximately 10.0°,1.0°, and 0.1°, respectively, to the feedback armrotation.


4. From the adjustment menu, select the direction andsize of change required to set the travel at 0%.Selecting large, medium, and small adjustmentscauses changes of approximately 10.0°, 1.0°, and0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm rotation.


5. From the adjustment menu, select the direction andsize of change required to set the travel to 100%.Selecting large, medium, and small adjustmentscauses changes of approximately 10.0°, 1.0°, and0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm rotation.


6. From the adjustment menu, select the direction andsize of change required to set the travel to 50%.Selecting large, medium, and small adjustmentscauses changes of approximately 10.0°, 1.0°, and0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm rotation.


7. From the adjustment menu, select the direction andsize of change required to set the travel to 0%.Selecting large, medium, and small adjustmentscauses changes of approximately 10.0°, 1.0°, and0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm rotation for asliding-stem valve or to the travel for a rotary valve.


8. From the adjustment menu, select the direction andsize of change required to set the travel to 100%.Selecting large, medium, and small adjustmentscauses changes of approximately 10.0°, 1.0°, and0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm rotation for asliding-stem valve or to the travel for a rotary valve.

6

DVC6000 SIS

May 20076-6


9. From the adjustment menu, select the direction andsize of change required to set the travel to near 5%.Selecting large, medium, and small adjustmentscauses changes of approximately 10.0°, 1.0°, and0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm rotation for asliding-stem valve or to the travel for a rotary valve.


10. From the adjustment menu, select the directionand size of change required to set the travel to near95%. Selecting large, medium, and small adjustmentscauses changes of approximately 10.0°, 1.0°, and0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm rotation for asliding-stem valve or to the travel for a rotary valve.



12. After manual calibration is completed manually setthe SIS parameters as described in Section 5. Seepage 5-13 for End Point Pressure Control; page 5-16Travel Deviation Alert Point and Travel DeviationTime; and page 5-22 for Partial Stroke Pressure Limit.

Sensor Calibration

Pressure Sensors (1-3-2-1) There are three pressure sensors: output A, output Band supply. Select the appropriate menu dependingupon which pressure sensor you are calibrating.

NoteThe pressure sensors are calibrated atthe factory and should not requirecalibration.

Output Pressure Sensor CalibrationTo calibrate the output pressure sensors, connect anexternal reference gauge to the output beingcalibrated. The gauge should be capable of measuringmaximum instrument supply pressure. From theCalibrate menu, select Sensor Calibration and PressSensors (Pressure Sensors). Depending upon the

sensor you wish to calibrate, select either Output ASensor or Output B Sensor. Follow the prompts on theField Communicator display to calibrate theinstrument�s output pressure sensor.

1. Adjust the supply pressure regulator to the desiredsupply pressure. Press OK.

2. Select a) Zero only, or b) Zero and Span (gaugerequired) sensor calibration.

a. If Zero only calibration is selected, wait untiloutput x pressure has completely exhausted, thencontinue. Once calibration is completed, go to step6. The output x pressure corresponds to A or B,depending on which output you are calibrating.

b. If Zero and Span calibration is selected, waituntil output x pressure has completely exhausted,then continue. You will then be asked to wait untiloutput x pressure has reached full supply, thencontinue. The output x pressure corresponds to Aor B, depending on which output you arecalibrating. Proceed with step 3.

3. The instrument sets the output pressure to fullsupply. The following message appears:

Use the Increase andDecrease selectionsuntil the displayedpressure matches theoutput x pressure.

The output x pressure corresponds to A or B,depending on which output you are calibrating. PressOK when you have read the message.

4. The value of the output pressure appears on thedisplay.

5. From the adjustment menu, select the direction andsize of adjustment to the displayed value. Selectinglarge, medium, and small adjustments causeschanges of approximately 3.0 psi/0.207 bar/20.7 kPa,0.30 psi/0.0207 bar/2.07 kPa, and 0.03 psi/0.00207bar/0.207 kPa, respectively. Adjust the displayed valueuntil it matches the output pressure, select Done andgo to step 6.

6. Place the instrument In Service and verify that thedisplayed pressure matches the measured outputpressure.

Supply Pressure Sensor CalibrationTo calibrate the supply pressure sensor, connect anexternal reference gauge to the output side of thesupply regulator. The gauge should be capable ofmeasuring maximum instrument supply pressure.From the Calibrate menu, select Sensor Calibration,

6

Calibration

May 2007 6-7

Press Sensors (Pressure Sensors), and SupplySensor. Follow the prompts on the FieldCommunicator display to calibrate the instrument�ssupply pressure sensor.

1. Select a) Zero Only, or b) Zero and Span (gaugerequired).

a. If Zero Only calibration is selected, adjust thesupply pressure regulator to remove supplypressure from the instrument. Press OK. Oncecalibration is complete, go to step 5.

b. If Zero and Span calibration is selected, adjustthe supply pressure regulator to remove supplypressure from the instrument. Press OK. Adjust thesupply regulator to the maximum instrument supplypressure. Press OK. Proceed with step 2.

2. The following message appears:

Use the Increase andDecrease selections untilthe displayed pressurematches the instrumentsupply pressure.

Press OK when you have read this message.

3. The value of the pressure appears on the display.

4. From the adjustment menu, select the direction andsize of adjustment to the displayed value. Selectinglarge, medium, and small adjustments causeschanges of approximately 3.0 psi/0.207 bar/20.7 kPa,0.30 psi/0.0207 bar/2.07 kPa, and 0.03 psi/0.00207bar/0.207 kPa, respectively. Adjust the displayed valueuntil it matches the supply pressure, select Done andgo to step 5.

5. Place the instrument In Service and verify that thedisplayed pressure matches the measured supplypressure.

Travel Sensor Adjust (1-3-2-2) The travel sensor is normally adjusted at the factoryand should not require adjustment. However, if thetravel sensor has been replaced, adjust the travelsensor by performing the appropriate procedure. Seethe Maintenance section for travel sensor replacementprocedures.

Figure 6-2. Type DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller ShowingFeedback Arm in Position for Travel Sensor Adjustment

Feedback Arm(key 79)

A

BTravel SensorShaft

Alignment Pin(key 46)

A7023 / IL

DVC6010 and DVC6030 Digital ValveControllers

WARNING

Failure to remove air pressure maycause personal injury or propertydamage from bursting parts.

1. Remove supply air and remove the instrument fromthe actuator.

2. As shown in figure 6-2, align the feedback arm (key79) with the housing by inserting the alignment pin(key 46) through the hole marked �A� on the feedbackarm. Fully engage the alignment pin into the tappedhole in the housing.

NoteThe alignment pin (key 46) isstored inside the digital valvecontroller housing.

3. Loosen the screw that secures the feedback arm tothe travel sensor shaft. Position the feedback arm sothat the surface of the feedback arm is flush with theend of the travel sensor shaft.

6

DVC6000 SIS

May 20076-8

TRAVELSENSORSHAFT

Figure 6-3. Type DVC6020 Travel Sensor Arm/Housing BackPlane Alignment

ARM ASSEMBLY

BACK OF HOUSING

ARM ASSEMBLY PIN

BACK EDGEOF ARM PARALLELW/BACK OF HOUSING

A7025 / IL

Table 6-2. DVC6000 Series Digital Valve Controller TravelSensor Counts

Digital Valve Controller Travel Sensor Counts

Type DVC6010 600 ±150

Type DVC6020 1950 ±150

Type DVC6030 600 ±150

4. Connect a current source to the instrument LOOP− and LOOP + terminals. Set the current source toany value between 4 and 20 mA. Connect the FieldCommunicator to the TALK terminals.

5. Before beginning the travel sensor adjustment, setthe instrument mode to Out Of Service and theprotection to None.

6. From the Calibrate menu select SensorCalibration,and Tvl Sensor Adjust (Travel SensorAdjust). Follow the prompts on the FieldCommunicator display to adjust the travel sensorcounts to the value listed in table 6-2.

NoteIn the next step, be sure the feedbackarm surface remains flush with the endof the travel sensor shaft.

7. While observing the travel sensor counts, tightenthe screw that secures the feedback arm to the travelsensor shaft. Be sure the travel sensor counts remainwithin the tolerances listed in table 6-2. Paint thescrew to discourage tampering with the connection.

8. Disconnect the Field Communicator and currentsource from the instrument.

9. Remove the alignment pin and store it in theinstrument housing.

10. Install the digital valve controller on the actuator.

DVC6020 Digital Valve Controllers

WARNING

Failure to remove air pressure maycause personal injury or propertydamage from bursting parts.

1. Remove supply air and remove the instrument fromthe actuator.

2. See figure 6-4 for parts identification. Disconnectthe bias spring (key 82) from the feedback armassembly (key 84) and the arm assembly (key 91).Remove the mounting bracket (key 74) from the backof the digital controller. Hold the arm assembly (key 91) so that the arm assembly points toward theterminal box and the arm is parallel to the back of thehousing, as shown in figure 6-3.

3. Loosen the screw that secures the arm assemblyto the travel sensor shaft. Position the arm assemblyso that the outer surface is flush with the end of thetravel sensor shaft.

4. Connect a current source to the instrument LOOP− and LOOP + terminals. Set the current source toany value between 4 and 20 mA. Connect the FieldCommunicator to the TALK terminals.

5. Before beginning the travel sensor adjustment, setthe instrument mode to Out Of Service and theprotection to None.

6. From the Calibrate menu, select Sensor Calibrationand Tvl Sensor Adjust (Travel Sensor Adjust). Followthe prompts on the Field Communicator display toadjust the travel sensor counts to the value listed intable 6-2.

NoteIn the next step, be sure the armassembly outer surface remains flushwith the end of the travel sensor shaft.

7. While observing the travel sensor counts, tightenthe screw that secures the arm assembly to the travelsensor shaft. Be sure the travel sensor counts remain

6

Calibration

May 2007 6-9

Figure 6-4. Type DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller Mounted on Type 1052, Size 33 Actuator

MOUNTINGADAPTER(KEY 117)

FEEDBACK ARM ASSEMBLY(KEY 84)FEEDBACK ARM

TORSION SPRING(KEY 93)

BIAS SPRING(KEY 82)

ARM ASSEMBLY PIN

ARM ASSEMBLY(KEY 91)

MOUNTING BRACKET(KEY 74)

CAP SCREW, HEX SOCKET(KEY 116)

CAP SCREW, HEX HEAD(KEY 92)

A7024 -2/ IL

within the tolerances listed in table 6-2. Paint thescrew to discourage tampering with the connection.

8. Disconnect the Field Communicator and currentsource from the instrument.

9. Apply lubricant (key 63) to the pin portion of the

arm assembly (key 91).

10. Replace the mounting bracket on the back of theinstrument and reconnect the bias spring between thefeedback arm assembly and the arm assembly on thetravel sensor shaft.

11. Install the digital valve controller on the actuator.

6

DVC6000 SIS

May 20076-10

Analog Input Calibration (1-3-2-3)

NoteAnalog Input Calibration is onlyavailable in 4-wire systems(point-to-point operation).

To calibrate the analog input sensor, connect avariable current source to the instrument LOOP+ andLOOP− terminals. The current source should becapable of generating an output of 4 to 20 mA. Fromthe Configure / Setup menu select Calibrate, SensorCalibration, and Analog In Calib (Analog InputCalibration). Follow the prompts on the FieldCommunicator display to calibrate the analog inputsensor.

1. Set the current source to the target value shown onthe display. The target value is the Input Range Lowvalue. Press OK.


Use Increase andDecrease selectionsuntil the displayedcurrent matches thecurrent source.


3. The value of the Analog Input appears on thedisplay.

4. From the adjustment menu, select the direction andsize of adjustment to the displayed value. Selectinglarge, medium, and small adjustments causeschanges of approximately 0.4 mA, 0.04 mA, and 0.004mA, respectively. Adjust the displayed value until itmatches the current source, select Done and go tostep 5.

5. Set the current source to the target value shown onthe display. The target value is the Input Range Highvalue. Press OK.


Use Increase andDecrease selectionsuntil the displayedcurrent matches thecurrent source.


7. The value of the Analog Input appears on thedisplay.

8. From the adjustment menu, select the direction andsize of adjustment to the displayed value. Selectinglarge, medium, and small adjustments causeschanges of approximately 0.4 mA, 0.04 mA, and 0.004mA, respectively. Adjust the displayed value until itmatches the current source, select Done and go tostep 9.

9. Place the instrument In Service and verify that theanalog input displayed matches the current source.

Relay Adjustment (1-3-3) Before beginning travel calibration, check the relayadjustment. To check relay adjustment, select RelayAdjust from the Calibrate menu, then follow theprompts on the Field Communicator display. Replacethe digital valve controller cover when finished.

NoteRelay B and C are not user-adjustable.

Double-Acting RelayThe double-acting relay is designated by �Relay A� ona label affixed to the relay itself. For double-actingactuators, the valve must be near mid-travel toproperly adjust the relay. The Field Communicator willautomatically position the valve when Relay Adjust isselected.

Rotate the adjustment disc, shown in figure 6-5, untilthe output pressure displayed on the FieldCommunicator is between 50 and 70% of supplypressure. This adjustment is very sensitive. Be sure toallow the pressure reading to stabilize before makinganother adjustment (stabilization may take up to 30seconds or more for large actuators).

Low bleed relay (standard for SIS) stabilization maytake approximately two minutes longer than thestandard relay.

6

Calibration

May 2007 6-11

Figure 6-5. Location of Relay Adjustment (Shroud Removed for Clarity)

ADJUSTMENT DISC

FOR DOUBLE-ACTING RELAYS:ROTATE ADJUSTMENT DISC INTHIS DIRECTION TO INCREASEOUTPUT PRESSURE

FOR DOUBLE-ACTING RELAYS:ROTATE ADJUSTMENT DISC INTHIS DIRECTION TO DECREASEOUTPUT PRESSURE

FOR SINGLE-ACTING DIRECT RELAYS:ROTATE ADJUSTMENT DISC IN THISDIRECTION UNTIL IT CONTACTS THEBEAM

LOW BLEED RELAYDOES NOT HAVE BLEED HOLES

W9305

Single-Acting Relays

WARNING

If the unused port is monitoringpressure, ensure that the pressuresource conforms to ISA Standard7.0.01, and does not exceed thepressure supplied to the instrument.

Failure to do so could result inpersonal injury or property damagecaused by loss of process control.

Single-Acting Direct RelayThe single-acting direct relay is designated by �RelayC� on a label affixed to the relay itself. Relay Crequires no adjustment.

Single-Acting Reverse Relay

The single-acting reverse relay is designated by�Relay B� on a label affixed to the relay itself. Relay Bis calibrated at the factory and requires no furtheradjustment.

Restoring Factory Settings (1-3-4) From the Online menu, select Configure / Setup, thenselect Calibrate, and Restore Factory Settings. Followthe prompts on the Field Communicator display torestore calibration to the factory settings. You shouldonly restore the calibration if it is not possible tocalibrate an individual sensor. Restoring calibrationreturns the calibration of all of the sensors and thetuning set to their factory settings. Followingrestoration of the factory calibration, the individualsensors should be recalibrated.

6

DVC6000 SIS

May 20076-12

PST Calibration (1-3-5)Access PST Calibration by selecting PST Calibrationfrom the Calibrate menu. Follow the prompts on theField Communicator display to complete the PSTcalibration.

This procedure permits you to run the Partial StrokeCalibration, which enables the Partial Stroke Test. Itestablishes values for Partial Stroke Pressure Limit,Pressure Set Point and Pressure Saturation Time forEnd Point Pressure Control, Travel Deviation AlertPoint and Travel Deviation Time. The Partial StrokeCalibration also sets default values for max travelmovement, test speed, and test pause time.

NoteYou must take the instrument out ofservice before running Partial StrokeCalibration.

Ensure that the instrument is put backin service after the completing thecalibration procedure.

6


May 2007 7-1

7-7

Section 7 Viewing Device Information

Device Diagnostics 7-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alert Conditions 7-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic AlertsSensor AlertsEnvironmental AlertsTravel AlertsTravel History AlertsSIS Alerts

Status 7-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Device Record 7-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temp MaxTemp MinRun TimeNumber of Power Ups

Stroke Valve 7-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Partial Stroke Test 7-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device (Digital Valve Controller)Auxiliary Terminal

Auxiliary Terminal Wiring Length GuidelinesModel 375 Field Communicator

Additional SIS Diagnostics 7-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Reset 7-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Demand Mode Tests 7-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solenoid Valve Health Monitoring 7-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Device Variables 7-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Analog Input 7-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Travel Set Point 7-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Travel 7-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Drive Signal 7-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pressures 7-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure APressure BPressure DifferentialSupply Pressure

Variables 7-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary Input

7

DVC6000 SIS

May 20077-2

TemperatureTemperature MaximumTemperature MinimumCycle CountTvl AccumRaw Travel InputRun TimeNumber of Power Ups

Device Information 7-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HART TagDevice IDManufacturerModelDevice RevisionFirmware RevisionHardware RevisionInstrument LevelHART� Universal Revision

DD Information 7-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7


May 2007 7-3

Device Diagnostics

Alert Conditions (2-1)Instrument Alert Conditions, when enabled, detectmany operational and performance issues that may beof interest. To view these alerts, from the Online menuselect Device Diagnostics, and Alert Conditions. Thealert conditions for each group of alerts are listedbelow. If there are no alerts active for a particulargroup the group will not be displayed on the FieldCommunicator.

� Electronics� If an electronics alert is active itwill appear under ELECT ALERTS.

Drive CurrentDrive Current Alert�This alert is indicated when the

drive current does not read as expected. If this alertoccurs, check the connection between the I/Pconverter and the printed wiring board assembly. Tryremoving the I/P converter and re-installing it. If thefailure does not clear, replace the I/P converter or theprinted wiring board assembly.

Drive SignalDrive Signal Alert�This alert is indicated when the

Drive Signal is greater or less than the expectedmaximum or minimum.

Processor ImpairedOffline/Failed Alert�This alert is indicated if a

failure, enabled from the Self Test Shutdown menu,caused an instrument shutdown. Press Enter to seewhich of the specific failures caused the Offline/Failedindication.

Power Starvation Alert�This alert is indicated if theinstrument does not have enough power to functionproperly.

Non-Critical NVM Alert�This alert is indicated if thechecksum for data, which are not critical for instrumentoperation, has failed.

Critical NVM Alert�This alert is indicated when theNon-Volatile Memory integrity test fails. Configurationdata is stored in NVM. If this failure is indicated,restart the instrument and see if it clears. If it does notclear, replace the PWB Assembly.

Flash ROM Alert�This alert indicates that the ReadOnly Memory integrity test failed. If this alert isindicated, restart the instrument and see if it clears. Ifit does not clear, replace the printed wiring boardassembly.

No Free Time Alert�This alert is indicated if theinstrument is unable to complete all of the configuredtasks. This will not occur with a properly functioninginstrument.

Reference Voltage Alert�This failure is indicatedwhenever there is a failure associated with the internalvoltage reference. If this alert is indicated, restart theinstrument and see if it clears. If it does not clear,replace the printed wiring board assembly.

Internal Sensor Out of Limits�This alert is indicatedif there is a possible problem with either the pressuresensor or the printed wiring board assemblysubmodule.

Variable Out of Range�This alert is indicated ifthere is a possible problem with one or more of thefollowing: the Analog Input Signal, the I/P convertersubmodule, the pneumatic relay submodule, or theprinted wiring board.

Field device malfunction�The alert is indicated ifthe pressure, position, or temperature sensors areproviding invalid readings.

� Sensor� If a sensor alert is active it will appearunder SENSOR ALERTS.

Travel SensorTravel Sensor Alert�This alert is indicated if the

sensed travel is outside the range of −25.0 to 125.0%of calibrated travel. If this alert is indicated, check theinstrument mounting and the travel sensor adjustment.Also, check that the electrical connection from thetravel sensor is properly plugged into the printed wiringboard assembly. After restarting the instrument, if thealert does not clear, troubleshoot the printed wiringboard assembly or travel sensor.

Pressure SensorsPressure Sensor Alert�This alert is indicated if the

actuator pressure is outside the range of −24.0 to125.0% of the calibrated pressure for more than 60seconds. If this alert is indicated, check the instrumentsupply pressure. If the failure persists, ensure theprinted wiring board assembly is properly mountedonto the Module Base Assembly, and the pressuresensor O-rings are properly installed. If the alert doesnot clear after restarting the instrument, replace theprinted wiring board assembly.

NoteThe pressure sensor alert is used foroutput A, output B, and the supplypressure sensor. Check the pressurevalues to see which sensor is causingthe alert.

Temperature Sensor Temperature Sensor Alert�This alert is indicated

when the instrument temperature sensor fails, or the

7

DVC6000 SIS

May 20077-4

sensor reading is outside of the range of −40 to 85�C(−40 to 185�F). The temperature reading is usedinternally for temperature compensation of inputs. Ifthis alert is indicated, restart the instrument and see ifit clears. If it does not clear, replace the printed wiringboard assembly.

� Environment� If an environment alert is activeit will appear under ENVIRO ALERTS.

Supply PressureSupply Pressure Lo Alert�This alert is indicated

when supply pressure is lower than the configuredlimit.

Aux Terminal AlertAux Terminal Alert�This alert is set when the

auxiliary input terminals are either open or closed,depending upon the selection for the Aux In Alrt State.

� Travel� If a travel alert is active it will appearunder TRAVEL ALERTS.

Travel DeviationTravel Deviation Alert�The difference between

Setpoint and Travel is greater than the configuredlimits.

Travel LimitTravel Alert Hi Hi�This alert is indicated if the

Travel is greater than the configured limit.

Travel Alert Lo Lo�This alert is indicated if theTravel is lower than the configured limit.

Travel Limit Hi/LoTravel Alert Hi�This alert is indicated if the Travel

is greater than the configured limit.

Travel Alert Lo�This alert is indicated if the Travelis lower than the configured limit.

Travel Limit / CutoffTravel Limit/Cutoff Hi�This alert is indicated if the

Travel is limited high or the high cutoff is in effect.

Travel Limit/Cutoff Lo�This alert is indicated if theTravel is limited low or the low cutoff is in effect.

� Travel History� If a travel history alert is activeit will appear under TVL HIST ALERTS.

Cycle CountCycle Count Alert�This alert is indicated if the

Cycle Counter exceeds the Cycle Count Alert Point.

Travel Accumulator Travel Accumulator Alert�This alert is indicated if

the Travel Accum exceeds the Travel AccumulatorAlert Point.

Table 7-1. Alerts Included in Alert Groups for Alert RecordAlert Group Alerts Include in Group

Valve Alerts

Travel Alert LoTravel Alert HiTravel Alert Lo LoTravel Alert Hi HiTravel deviationDrive signal

Failure Alerts

No free timeFlash ROM failDrive current failRef Voltage failNVM failTemperature sensor failPressure sensor failTravel sensor fail

Miscellaneous Alerts Auxiliary input

� SIS� If an SIS alert is active it will appear underSIS ALERTS.

Partial Stroke Test (PST)Valve Stuck or Pressure/Travel Path

Obstructed�This alert is indicated if the valve is stuckor the pressure/travel path is obstructed.

End Point Pressure DeviationPressure Deviation Alert�The alert is indicated if

the difference between the target pressure and theactual pressure exceeds the Pressure Deviation AlertPoint for a period of time greater than the PressureDeviation Time.

Locked in Safety Alert�This alert is indicated if theunit is locked in the safety position.

SIS Panel Comm Error�This alert is indicated if theSIS panel is not communicating.

� Alert RecordAlert Record not Empty�This alert indicates that an

alert has been saved to the alert record.

Alrt Record Full�This alert indicates that the alertrecord is full.

Viewing Instrument Status (2-2)To view the instrument status, from the DeviceDiagnostics menu select Status. This menu itemindicates the status of the Operational items listedbelow. The status of more than one operational itemmay be indicated.

Instrument Time

Inst Time Invalid

Calibration and Diagnostics

Cal in Progress

Autocal in Progress

Diag in Progress

7


May 2007 7-5

Diag Data Avail

Operational

Press Ctrl Active

Multi-Drop

Integrator

Integrator Sat Hi

Integrator Sat Lo

Device Record (2-3)From the Online menu, select Device Diagnostics andDevice Record. Follow the prompts on the FieldCommunicator display to view the following DeviceRecord parameters: Temp Max (MaximumTemperature), Temp Min (Minimum Temperature),Run Time, and Num of Power Ups (Number of PowerUps).

� Temp Max�Maximum Recorded Temperatureshows the maximum temperature the instrument hasexperienced since installation.

� Temp Min�Minimum Recorded Temperatureshows the minimum temperature the instrument hasexperienced since installation.

� Run Time�Indicates in hours or days the totalelapsed time the instrument has been powered up.

� Num of Power Ups�Number of Power Upsindicates how many times the instrument has cycledpower.

Stroking the Digital Valve ControllerOutput (2-4) From the Online menu, select Device Diagnostics andStroke Valve. Follow the prompts on the FieldCommunicator display to select from the following:Done, Ramp Open, Ramp Closed, Ramp to Target,Step to Target, and Stop.

� Done�Select this if you are done. All ramping isstopped when DONE is selected.

� Ramp Open�ramps the travel toward open atthe rate of 1.0% per second of the ranged travel.

� Ramp Closed�ramps the travel toward closed atthe rate of 1.0% per second of the ranged travel.

� Ramp to Target�ramps the travel to thespecified target at the rate of 1.0% per second of theranged travel.

� Step to Target�steps the travel to the specifiedtarget.

Partial Stroke Test (2-5)

WARNING

During the partial stroke test the valvewill move. To avoid personal injuryand property damage caused by therelease of pressure or process fluid,when used in an application wherethe valve is normally closed, providesome temporary means of control forthe process.

The Partial Stroke Test allows the DVC6000 Seriesdigital valve controllers with instrument level SIS toperform a Valve Signature type of test while theinstrument is in service and operational. In SISapplications, it is important to be able to exercise andtest the valve to verify that it will operate whencommanded. This feature allows the user to partiallystroke the valve while continually monitoring the inputsignal. If a demand arises, the test is aborted and thevalve moves to its commanded position. The partialstroke valve travel is configurable between 1 and 30%maximum travel, in 0.1% increments. Data from thelast partial stroke test is stored in the instrumentmemory for retrieval by AMS ValveLink Software.

The Partial Stroke Test allows you to perform a partial,10%, stroke test (standard) or a custom stroke test.With the custom stroke test, the stroke may beextended up to 30%. Be sure to check plant guidelinesbefore performing a custom stroke test. The purposeof this test is to ensure that the valve assembly movesupon demand.

A partial stroke test can be initiated when the valve isoperating at either 4 or 20 mA (point-to-point mode). Inapplications where a spurious trip is to be minimized, 4mA is the normal operating position.

When enabled, a partial stroke test may be initiated bythe device (as a scheduled, auto partial stroke test), aremote push button located in the field or at the valve,the optional LCP100 local control panel, the Model 375Field Communicator, or AMS ValveLink Software.

Device (Digital Valve Controller)The Auto Partial Stroke Test allows the partial stroketest to be scheduled by the DVC6000. The test isscheduled in number of hours between tests. Anypower cycle will reset the test interval timer.

7

DVC6000 SIS

May 20077-6

PRESS TO PERFORMTHE CONFIGUREDPARTIAL STROKETEST

Figure 7-1. Local Control Panel

Auxiliary TerminalThe auxiliary terminal can be used for differentapplications. The default configuration is for a partialstroke test initiated by shorting the contacts wired tothe auxiliary +/− terminals of the DVC6000. Refer toAuxiliary Terminal Wiring Length Guidelines below.

� Local Push Button

A partial stroke test command may be sent to theDVC6000 Series digital valve controller using a set ofcontacts wired to the auxiliary +/− terminals. Toperform a test, the contacts must be closed for 3 to 5seconds and then opened. To abort the test, close thecontacts for 1 second. The last set of diagnostic datais stored in the instrument memory for later retrievalvia AMS ValveLink Software.

� Local Control Panel

The LCP100 local control panel is wired directly to theDVC6000 SIS digital valve controller.

The black �Valve Test� push button (see figure 7-1)allows the valve to perform the configured partialstroke test.

� Press and hold for 3 to 10 seconds

The test can be overridden by the �Valve Close�button, �Valve Open� button, or if an emergencydemand occurs.

� Local DI

When configured by the user interface, the AuxiliaryTerminal can be used as a discrete input from apressure switch, temperature switch, etc., to providean alert.

Auxiliary Terminal Wiring Length Guidelines

The Auxiliary Input Terminals of a DVC6000 withinstrument level SIS can be used with alocally-mounted switch for initiating a partial stroketest. Some applications require that the partial stroketest be initiated from a remote location.

The length for wiring connected to the Auxiliary InputTerminals is limited by capacitance. For properoperation of the Auxiliary Input Terminals capacitanceshould not exceed 18000 pF. As with all control signalwiring, good wiring practices should be observed tominimize adverse effect of electrical noise on the AuxSwitch function.

Example Calculation: Capacitance per foot or permeter is required to calculate the length of wire thatmay be connected to the Aux switch input. The wireshould not exceed the capacitance limit of 18000 pF.Typically the wire manufacturer supplies a data sheetwhich provides all of the electrical properties of thewire. The pertinent parameter is the highest possiblecapacitance. If shielded wire is used, the appropriatenumber is the �Conductor to Other Conductor &Shield� value.

Example � 18AWG Unshielded Audio, Controland Instrumentation Cable

Manufacturer�s specifications include:

Nom. Capacitance Conductor to Conductor @ 1 KHz: 26 pF/ft

Nom. Conductor DC Resistance @ 20 Deg. C: 5.96 Ohms/1000 ft

Max. Operating Voltage − UL 200 V RMS (PLTC, CMG),150 V RMS(ITC)

Allowable Length with this cable = 18000pF /(26pF/ft) = 692 ft

Example � 18AWG Shielded Audio, Control andInstrumentation Cable

Manufacturer�s specifications include:

Nom. Characteristic Impedance: 29 Ohms

Nom. Inductance: .15 μH/ft

7


May 2007 7-7

Nom. Capacitance Conductor to Conductor @ 1 KHz: 51 pF/ft

Nom. Cap. Cond. to other Cond. & Shield @ 1 KHz 97 pF/ft

Allowable Length with this cable = 18000pF /(97pF/ft) = 185 ft

The AUX switch input passes less than 1 mA throughthe switch contacts, and uses less than 5V, therefore,neither the resistance nor the voltage rating of thecable are critical. Ensure that switch contact corrosionis prevented. It is generally advisable that the switchhave gold-plated or sealed contacts.

Model 375 Field Communicator1. Connect the Model 375 Field Communicator to theLOOP terminals on the digital valve controller.

2. Turn on the Field Communicator.

3. From the Online menu, select Device Diagnosticsand Partial Stroke Test.

4. Select either Standard (10%) or Custom. With theCustom Stroke Test, the stroke may be entered up to30% with configurable stroking speed and pause time.

5. The currently configured Stroke, Stroking Speed,and Pause Time is displayed. Choose �Yes� to run thetest using these values. Choose �No� to modify thevalues. The default value for Stroke Speed is0.25%/second.

6. The valve begins to move and the actual travelreported by the digital valve controller is displayed onthe Field Communicator.

7. Once the valve has reached the endpoint, checkthat the valve has reached the desired set point. Thevalve should return to its original position.

For information on configuring the Partial Stroke Test,see Partial Stroke Variables in the Detailed Setupsection.

Additional SIS Diagnostics

Manual Reset

The DVC6000 Series digital valve controller in SISapplications can be configured to hold the trip stateuntil a local reset button is pressed. It is configurableby the 375 Field Communicator or AMS ValveLinkSoftware. Manual Reset can be initiated by shortingthe AUX terminals with a user-supplied push button forat least 3 seconds, but less than 5 seconds or bypressing the button next to the green light on theoptional LCP100 local control panel when the currentis at it�s normal state. The digital valve controller willdrive the valve to its normal operating position.

Demand Mode TestsThe following steps assume the use of single actingspring and diaphragm actuators or double-actingspring assist piston actuators.

Perform the following steps to confirm valve operation:

a. Point-to-Point Mode (DVC6000 powered with 4−20 mA current source)

If the DVC6000 is in series with a solenoid valve,

1. Disconnect the power from the solenoid valve,but maintain the 20 mA current to the digital valvecontroller. The valve should move to its �fail safe�position.

2. Maintain power to the solenoid valve and adjustthe current to the digital valve controller from 20 mA to 4mA. The valve should move to its �failsafe� position.

3. Remove power from the solenoid valve andadjust the current to the digital valve controllerfrom 20mA to 4mA. The valve should go to its �failsafe� position.

If a solenoid is not used with a DVC6000,

1. Adjust the current to the digital valve controllerfrom 20 mA to 4 mA. The valve should move to its�fail safe� position.

NoteThe above tests are applicable forsingle-acting direct relays A and C. Ifsingle-acting reverse relay B is usedadjust the current from 4 mA (normalstate) to 20 mA (trip state).

b. Multidrop Mode (DVC6000 is powered by a 24 VDC power source)

If the DVC6000 is in series with a solenoid valve, andshares a single power source,

Disconnect power to both devices. The valveshould go to its �fail safe� position.

If the DVC6000 is in series with a solenoid valve, withindependent power sources,

Connect a 24 VDC power supply to the solenoidvalve and a second 24 VDC power supply to theDVC6000. Disconnect the solenoid valve powersupply, but maintain the power supply to the

7

DVC6000 SIS

May 20077-8

DVC6000. The valve should go to its �fail safe�position quickly. Then, maintain the power supplyto the solenoid valve and disconnect the DVC6000power supply. The valve should go to its �fail safe�position, although not as quickly as it does in theprevious scenario.

If DVC6000 is alone, without a solenoid valve,

Disconnect power to the digital valve controller.The valve should go to its �fail safe� position.

NoteThe above tests are not applicable forsingle-acting reverse relay B when nosolenoid valve is present.

If the LCP100 is used, conduct the following tests:

Successful Partial Stroke Test

1. Press the �Valve Test� (black) push button formore than 3 seconds (but less than 10 seconds).

2. Observe that the green light starts flashingwhen the valve starts moving.

3. Observe that the valve moves no more thanthe configured PST travel limit.

4. Observe that the valve returns to the normaloperating position and the green light comes onsolid.

Manually Aborted Partial Stroke Test

1. Press the �Valve Test� (black) push button formore than 3 seconds (but less than 10 seconds).

2. Observe that the green light starts flashingwhen the valve starts moving.

3. Before the valve reaches the travel limit of theconfigured partial stroke test, press the �ValveTest� push button, or the push button next to thegreen light.

4. Observe that the valve immediately returns tothe normal operating position and the green lightcomes on solid.

Emergency Demand through the Logic Solver

1. Reduce the current to the DVC6000 to 4 mAfor de-energize to trip operation.

NoteYou may remove the powercompletely; however, the lights in step 3 will be off. Without power to theDVC6000, the LCP100 cannot function.

2. Observe that the valve moves to its fail safestate.

3. Observe that the red light comes on solid andthe amber light stays off (valve is not ready toopen).

4. Press the push button next to the green lightand observe that the valve does not move.

5. Increase the current to the DVC6000 to 20 mAand observe that the valve remains in its fail safestate.

6. Observe that the red light stays on solid andthe amber light comes on solid (ready to reset).

7. Press the push button next to the green light.

8. Observe that the green light starts flashing,then becomes solid and the red light is off.

Emergency Demand through Local Control Panel

1. Press the push button next to the red light.

2. Observe that the valve moves to it fail safeposition.

3. Observe that the red light starts flashing, thenbecomes solid and the amber light comes on solid(ready to reset).

4. Press the push button next to the green light.

5. Observe that the red light goes off, the valvemoves to its normal operating position, and thegreen light comes on solid.

Solenoid Valve Health MonitoringThe following steps assume the use of a single-actingactuator with a solenoid valve installed. The DVC6000digital valve controller, with single-acting, direct relayC, must be powered separately from the solenoid. Theunused output of the DVC6000 must be connectedbetween the solenoid and the actuator as described inthe Installation section. The relay configurationselection must be �special application� and AMSValveLink Software must have the triggered profileenabled.

1. When allowed by the Logic Solver, momentarilyremove and then restore power to the solenoid(typically 100 to 200 milliseconds). This process

7


May 2007 7-9

should occur quickly enough that the valve assemblydoes not move when the solenoid is de-energized.

2. With AMS ValveLink Software, upload thediagnostic data from the triggered profile menu.

3. Examine the graph and observe that there was achange in the pressure reading downstream of thesolenoid.

Device VariablesThe following menus are available to define and/orview information about the instrument. From theOnline menu select Device Variables.

Analog In (3-1)

Analog Input shows the value of the instrument analoginput in mA (milliamperes) or % (percent) of rangedinput.

Tvl Set Pt (3-2)

Travel Set Point shows the requested valve position in% of ranged travel.

Travel (3-3)

Travel shows the value of the DVC6000 Series digitalvalve controller travel in % (percent) of ranged travel.Travel always represents how far the valve is open.

Drive Signal (3-4)

Drive Signal shows the value of the instrument drivesignal in % (percent) of maximum drive.

Pressures (3-5)

Shows the value of the instrument supply and outputpressures in psi, bar, kPa, or kg/cm2. Also shows theoutput pressure differential. To display pressures mayrequire selecting the variable; a detail display of thatvariable with its values will appear.

� Pressure A� Pressure A shows the value ofOutput Pressure A in psi, bar, kPa, or kg/cm2.

� Pressure B� Pressure B shows the value ofOutput Pressure A in psi, bar, kPa, or kg/cm2.

� Pressure Diff�Pressure Differential shows thevalue of the output pressure differential in psi, bar,kPa, or kg/cm2.

� Supply Pressure�Supply Pressure displays theinstrument supply pressure in psi ,bar, kPa, or kg/cm2.

Variables (3-6)

The Variables menu is available to view additionalvariables, including; Aux Input (Auxiliary Input),Temperature, Temp Max (Maximum Temperature),Temp Min (Minimum Temperature), Cycle Count, TvlAccum (Travel Accumulator), Raw Tvl Input (RawTravel Input), Run Time, and Num of Power Ups(Number of Power Ups).

To view one of these variables, from the Online menuselect Device Variables and Variables. If a value for avariable does not appear on the display, select thevariable and a detailed display of that variable with itsvalue will appear. A variable�s value does not appearon the menu if the value becomes too large to fit in theallocated space on the display, or if the variablerequires special processing, such as Aux Input.

� Aux Input�The Auxiliary Input is a discrete inputthat can be used with an independent limit or pressureswitch. Its value is either open or closed.

� Temperature�The internal temperature of theinstrument is displayed in either degrees Fahrenheit orCelsius.

� Temp Max�Maximum Recorded Temperatureshows the maximum temperature the instrument hasexperienced since installation.

� Temp Min�Minimum Recorded Temperatureshows the minimum temperature the instrument hasexperienced since installation.

� Cycle Count�Cycle Counter displays thenumber of times the valve travel has cycled. Onlychanges in direction of the travel after the travel hasexceeded the deadband are counted as a cycle. Oncea new cycle has occurred, a new deadband aroundthe last travel is set. The value of the Cycle Countercan be reset from the Cycle Count Alert menu. Seepage 5-17 of the Detailed Setup section for additionalinformation.

� Tvl Accum�Travel Accumulator contains thetotal change in travel, in percent of ranged travel. Theaccumulator only increments when travel exceeds thedeadband. Then the greatest amount of change in onedirection from the original reference point (after thedeadband has been exceeded) will be added to theTravel Accumulator. The value of the TravelAccumulator can be reset from the Travel Accummenu. See page 5-17 of the Detailed Setup section foradditional information.

7

DVC6000 SIS

May 20077-10

NoteDo not use the following raw travelinput indication for calibrating thetravel sensor. The following shouldonly be used for a relative indication tobe sure the travel sensor is workingand that it is moving in the correctdirection. Perform the Travel SensorAdjust procedure in the Calibrationsection to calibrate the travel sensor.

� Raw Tvl Input�Raw travel input indicates thetravel sensor position in analog-to-digital convertercounts. When the travel sensor is operating correctly,this number changes as the valve strokes.

� Run Time�Indicates in hours or days the totalelapsed time the instrument has been powered up.

� Num of Power Ups�Number of Power UpsIndicates how many times the instrument has cycledpower.

Device Information (3-7)

The Device Information menu is available to viewinformation about the instrument. From the Onlinemenu, select Device Variables and DeviceInformation. Follow the prompts on the FieldCommunicator display to view information in thefollowing fields: HART Tag, Device ID, Manufacturer,Model, Device Rev (Device Revision), Firmware Rev(Firmware Revision), Hardware Rev (HardwareRevision), Inst Level (Instrument Level), and HARTUniv Rev (HART Universal Revision).

� Hart Tag�A HART tag is a unique name (up toeight characters) that identifies the physicalinstrument.

� Device ID�Each instrument has a unique DeviceIdentifier. The device ID provides additional security toprevent this instrument from accepting commandsmeant for other instruments.

Table 7-2. Functions Available for Instrument LevelFunctions Available

Communicates with Model 375 Field Communicator and AMSValveLink Software. Provides: travel cutoffs and limits, minimumopening and closing times, input characterization (linear, equalpercentage, quick opening, and custom), trending with ValveLinkSolo, and the following alerts: travel deviation; travel alert high, low,high high, and low low; drive signal; auxiliary terminal; cycle counter;and travel accumulation. With AMS ValveLink Software, all offlinediagnostic tests (dynamic error band, drive signal, step response, andvalve signature) plus online trending and partial stroke test

� Manufacturer�Identifies the manufacturer of theinstrument.

� Model�Identifies the instrument model.

� Device Rev�Device Revision is the revisionnumber of the software for communication betweenthe Field Communicator and the instrument.

� Firmware Rev�Firmware Revision is the revisionnumber of the firmware in the instrument.

� Hardware Rev�Hardware Revision is therevision number of the electrical circuitry within theinstrument printed wiring board.

� Inst Level�Indicates the instrument level − SIS

Table 7-2 lists the functions available instrument levelSIS.

� HART Univ Rev�HART Universal Revision isthe revision number of the HART UniversalCommands which are used as the communicationsprotocol for the instrument.

� DD Information (3-8)

DD Information contains the device description in theField Communicator. To access DD Information fromthe Online menu, select Device Variables and DDInformation.

7


May 2007 8-1

8-8

Section 8 Principle of Operation

HART� Communication 8-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Digital Valve Controller Operation 8-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

DVC6000 SIS

May 20078-2

Figure 8-1. HART Frequency Shift Keying Technique

−0.5 mA

+0.5 mA

1200 Hz�1�

2200 Hz�0�

AVERAGE CURRENT CHANGE DURING COMMUNICATION = 0

ANALOGSIGNAL

0

A6174/IL

HART� Communication The HART (Highway Addressable RemoteTransducer) protocol gives field devices the capabilityof communicating instrument and process datadigitally. This digital communication occurs over thesame two-wire loop that provides the 4�20 mAprocess control signal, without disrupting the processsignal. In this way, the analog process signal, with itsfaster update rate, can be used for control. At thesame time, the HART protocol allows access to digitaldiagnostic, maintenance, and additional process data.The protocol provides total system integration via ahost device.

The HART protocol uses frequency shift keying (FSK).Two individual frequencies of 1200 and 2200 Hz aresuperimposed over the 4�20 mA current signal. Thesefrequencies represent the digits 1 and 0 (see figure8-1). By superimposing a frequency signal over the4�20 mA current, digital communication is attained.The average value of the HART signal is zero,therefore no dc value is added to the 4�20 mA signal.Thus, true simultaneous communication is achievedwithout interrupting the process signal.

The HART protocol allows the capability ofmultidropping, i.e., networking several devices to asingle communications line. This process is well suitedfor monitoring remote applications such as pipelines,custody transfer sites, and tank farms. See table 9-3for instructions on changing the printed wiring boardDIP switch configuration to multidrop.

Digital Valve Controller Operation The DVC6000 Series digital valve controller housingcontains the travel sensor, terminal box, pneumaticinput and output connections and a module base thatmay be easily replaced in the field withoutdisconnecting field wiring or tubing. This mastermodule contains the following submodules: I/P

Figure 8-2. Typical FIELDVUE� Instrument to PersonalComputer Connections for AMS ValveLink� Software

FIELDTERM.

CONTROL SYSTEM

HARTMODEM

A6761 / IL

converter, printed wiring board (pwb) assembly, andpneumatic relay. The module base can be rebuilt byreplacing the submodules. See figures 8-4 and 8-5.

Process ApplicationsDVC6000 Series digital valve controllers areloop-powered instruments that provide a control valveposition proportional to an input signal from the controlroom. The following describes a double-acting TypeDVC6010 digital valve controller mounted on a pistonactuator.

The input signal is routed into the terminal box througha single twisted pair of wires and then to the printedwiring board assembly submodule where it is read bythe microprocessor, processed by a digital algorithm,and converted into an analog I/P drive signal.

As the input signal increases, the drive signal to theI/P converter increases, increasing the I/P outputpressure. The I/P output pressure is routed to thepneumatic relay submodule. The relay is alsoconnected to supply pressure and amplifies the smallpneumatic signal from the I/P converter. The relayaccepts the amplified pneumatic signal and providestwo output pressures. With increasing input (4 to 20mA signal), the output A pressure always increasesand the output B pressure decreases. The output Apressure is used for double-acting and single-actingdirect applications. The output B pressure is used for

8


May 2007 8-3

Figure 8-3. Figure 8-4. DVC6000 Series Digital Valve Controller Block Diagram

E0408 / IL

INPUT SIGNAL4−20 mA

+HART

SUPPLYPRESSURE

PRINTED WIRING BOARD

PNEUMATICRELAY

I/P CONVERTER

OUTPUT A

OUTPUT B

VALVE TRAVELFEEDBACK

AUXILIARYTERMINALS

TERMINAL BOX

DRIVESIGNAL

VALVE AND ACTUATOR

double-acting and single-acting reverse applications.For single-acting actuators, unused ports can also beused to monitor the actuator pressure if anyaccessories are used in the output of the digital valvecontroller. As shown in figure 8-4 the increased outputA pressure causes the actuator stem to movedownward. Stem position is sensed through thefeedback linkage by the travel sensor which iselectrically connected to the printed wiring boardassembly submodule. The stem continues to movedownward until the correct stem position is attained.At this point the printed wiring board assemblystabilizes the I/P drive signal. This positions theflapper to prevent any further increase in nozzlepressure.

As the input signal decreases, the drive signal to theI/P converter submodule decreases, decreasing theI/P output pressure. The pneumatic relay decreasesthe output A pressure and increases the output B

pressure. The stem moves upward until the correctposition is attained. At this point the printed wiringboard assembly stabilizes the I/P drive signal. Thispositions the flapper to prevent any further decrease innozzle pressure.

Safety Instrumented SystemApplicationsThe principle of operation of the DVC6000 is the samefor safety instrumented system applications as forprocess applications. However, when used in a safetyinstrumented system application the DVC6000 can beconfigured for two output positions. Depending onrelay action (direct or reverse) the DVC6000 can beconfigured for full pneumatic output during normaloperation and minimum output during trip condition, orvice versa.

8

DVC6000 SIS

May 20078-4

TRAVEL SENSOR

TERMINAL BOX

TERMINAL BOX COVER

MODULE BASE ASSEMBLY

PRINTED WIRING BOARD ASSEMBLY

I/P CONVERTER

PNEUMATIC RELAY

HOUSING

GAUGES

COVER

W8083-1 SIS

Figure 8-5. DVC6000 Series Digital Valve Controller Assembly

8

Maintenance

May 2007 9-1

9-9

Section 9 Maintenance

Instrument Troubleshooting 9-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking Voltage Available 9-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Module Base Maintenance

Removing the Module Base 9-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing the Module Base 9-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Submodule Maintenance

I/P ConverterRemoving the I/P Converter 9-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the I/P Converter 9-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printed Wiring Board (PWB) AssemblyRemoving the Printed Wiring Board Assembly 9-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the Printed Wiring Board Assembly 9-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Printed Wiring Board Switch 9-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pneumatic RelayRemoving the Pneumatic Relay 9-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the Pneumatic Relay 9-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gauges, Pipe Plugs or Tire Valves 9-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Terminal Box

Removing the Terminal Box 9-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing the Terminal Box 9-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Travel Sensor

DisassemblyDVC6010 Digital Valve Controller (Sliding-Stem) 9-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller(Rotary) 9-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVC6030 Digital Valve Controller (Rotary) 9-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AssemblyDVC6010 Digital Valve Controller(Sliding-Stem) 9-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller (Rotary) 9-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVC6030 Digital Valve Controller (Rotary) 9-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9

DVC6000 SIS

May 20079-2

The DVC6000 Series digital valve controller enclosureis rated NEMA 4X and IP66, therefore periodiccleaning of internal components is not required. If theDVC6000 is installed in an area where the exteriorsurfaces tend to get heavily coated or layered withindustrial or atmospheric contaminants, however, it isrecommended that the vent (key 52) be periodicallyinspected to ensure it is fully open. If the vent appearsto be clogged, the vent can be removed, cleaned andreplaced. Lightly brush the exterior of the vent toremove contaminant and run a mild water/detergentsolution through the vent to ensure it is fully open.

WARNING

Personal injury or property damagecan occur from cover failure due tooverpressure. Ensure that thehousing vent opening is open andfree of debris to prevent pressurebuildup under the cover.

WARNING

To avoid static discharge from theplastic cover, do not rub or clean thecover with solvents. To do so couldresult in an explosion. Clean with amild detergent and water only.

WARNING

Avoid personal injury or propertydamage from sudden release ofprocess pressure or bursting of parts.Before performing any maintenanceprocedures on the DVC6000 Seriesdigital valve controller:

� Always wear protective clothing,gloves, and eyewear to preventpersonal injury.

� Disconnect any operating linesproviding air pressure, electric power,or a control signal to the actuator. Besure the actuator cannot suddenlyopen or close the valve.

� Use bypass valves or completelyshut off the process to isolate thevalve from process pressure. Relieveprocess pressure from both sides ofthe valve.

� Vent the pneumatic actuatorloading pressure and relieve anyactuator spring precompression.

� Use lock-out procedures to be surethat the above measures stay in effectwhile you work on the equipment.

� Check with your process or safetyengineer for any additional measuresthat must be taken to protect againstprocess media.

CAUTION

When replacing components, use onlycomponents specified by the factory.Always use proper componentreplacement techniques, as presentedin this manual. Improper techniques orcomponent selection may invalidatethe approvals and the productspecifications, as indicated in table1-2. It may also impair operations andthe intended function of the device.

NoteIf the feedback arm (key 79) orfeedback arm assembly (key 84)is removed from the digital valvecontroller, the travel sensor (key77) must be recalibrated.

Because of the diagnostic capability of the DVC6000Series digital valve controllers, predictive maintenanceis available through the use of AMS ValveLinkSoftware. Using the digital valve controller, valve andinstrument maintenance can be enhanced, thusavoiding unnecessary maintenance. For informationon using the ValveLink Software, refer to the AMSValveLink Software online help.

Instrument Troubleshooting If communication or output difficulties are experiencedwith the instrument, refer to the troubleshooting chartin table 9-1.

9

Maintenance

May 2007 9-3

Table 9-1. Instrument Troubleshooting Symptom Possible Cause Action

1. Analog input reading atinstrument does not matchactual current provided.

1a. Control mode not Analog. 1a. Check the control mode using the Field Communicator. Ifin the Digital or Test mode, the instrument receives its setpoint as a digital signal. Control is not based on input current.Change Control Mode to Analog.

1b. Low control system compliance voltage. 1b. Check system compliance voltage (see Wiring Practicesin the Installation section.

1c. Instrument shutdown due to self test failure. 1c. Check instrument status using the Field Communicator(see Viewing Instrument Status in the Viewing DeviceInformation section).

1d. Analog input sensor not calibrated. 1d. Calibrate the analog input sensor (see Analog InputCalibration in the Calibration section).

1e. Current leakage. 1e. Excessive moisture in the terminal box can cause currentleakage. Typically the current will vary randomly if this is thecase. Allow the inside of the terminal box to dry, then retest.

2. Instrument will notcommunicate.

2a. Insufficient Voltage Available. 2a. Calculate Voltage Available (see Wiring Practices in theInstallation section). Voltage Available should be greater thanor equal to 11 VDC.

2b. Controller output Impedance too low. 2b. Install a HART filter after reviewing Control SystemCompliance Voltage requirements (see Wiring Practices in theInstallation section).

2c. Cable capacitance too high. 2c. Review maximum cable capacitance limits (see WiringPractices in the Installation section).

2d. HART filter improperly adjusted. 2d. Check filter adjustment (see the appropriate HART filterinstruction manual).

2e. Improper field wiring. 2e. Check polarity of wiring and integrity of connections. Makesure cable shield is grounded only at the control system.

2f. Controller output providing less than 4 mA to loop. 2f. Check control system minimum output setting, whichshould not be less than 3.8 mA.

2g. Disconnected loop wiring cable at PWB. 2g. Verify connectors are plugged in correctly.

2h. PWB DIP switch not set properly. 2h. Check for incorrect setting or broken DIP switch on theback of the PWB. Reset switch or replace PWB, if switch isbroken. See table 9-3 for switch setting information

2j. PWB failure. 2j. Use a 4−20 mA current source to apply power to theinstrument. Terminal voltage across the LOOP+ and LOOP−terminals should be 9 to 10.5 VDC. If the terminal voltage isnot 9 to 10.5 VDC, replace the PWB.

2k. Polling address incorrect. 2k. Use the Field Communicator to set the polling address(refer to the Detailed Setup section). From the Utilities menu,select Configure Communicator and Polling. Select AlwaysPoll. Set the instrument polling address to 0.

2l. Defective terminal box. 2l. Check continuity from each screw terminal to thecorresponding PWB connector pin. If necessary, replace theterminal box assembly.

2m. Defective Field Communicator or ValveLinkmodem cable.

2m. If necessary, repair or replace cable.

2n. ValveLink modem defective or not compatiblewith PC.

2n. Replace ValveLink modem.

2p. ValveLink hardlock defective or not programmed. 2p. Replace if defective or return to factory for programming.

3. Instrument will notcalibrate, has sluggishperformance or oscillates.

3a. Travel sensor seized, will not turn. 3a. Rotate feedback arm to ensure it moves freely. If not,replace the pot/bushing assy.

3b. Broken travel sensor wire(s). 3b. Inspect wires for broken solder joint at pot or broken wire.Replace pot/bushing assy.

3c. Travel sensor misadjusted. 3c. Perform Travel Sensor Adjust procedure in the Calibrationsection.

3d. Open travel sensor. 3d. Check for continuity in electrical travel range. If necessary,replace pot/bushing assy.

3e. Cables not plugged into PWB correctly. 3e. Inspect connections and correct.

3f. Feedback arm loose on pot. 3f. Perform Travel Sensor Adjust procedure in the Calibrationsection.

3g. Feedback arm bent/damaged or bias springmissing/damaged.

3g. Replace feedback arm and bias spring.

−continued−

9

DVC6000 SIS

May 20079-4

Table 9-1. Instrument Troubleshooting (Continued)Symptom ActionPossible Cause

3h. Configuration errors. 3h. Verify configuration:If necessary, set protection to None.If Out of Service, place In Service.Check:Travel Sensor MotionTuning setZero power conditionFeedback ConnectionControl mode (should be Analog)Restart control mode (should be Analog)

3j. Restricted pneumatic passages in I/P converter. 3j. Check screen in I/P converter supply port of the modulebase. Replace if necessary. If passages in I/P converterrestricted, replace I/P converter.

3k. O-ring(s) between I/P converter ass�y missing or hardand flattened losing seal.

3k. Replace O-ring(s).

3l. I/P converter ass�y damaged/corroded/clogged. 3l. Check for bent flapper, open coil (continuity),contamination, staining, or dirty air supply. Coil resistanceshould be between 1680 - 1860 ohms. Replace I/P assy ifdamaged, corroded, clogged, or open coil.

3m. I/P converter ass�y out of spec. 3m. I/P converter ass�y nozzle may have been adjusted. Verifydrive signal (55 to 80% for double-acting; 60 to 85% forsingle-acting) with the valve off the stops. Replace I/Pconverter ass�y if drive signal is continuously high or low.

3n. Defective module base seal. 3n. Check module base seal for condition and position. Ifnecessary, replace seal.

3p. Defective relay. 3p. Depress relay beam at adjustment location in shroud, lookfor increase in output pressure. Remove relay, inspect relayseal. Replace relay seal or relay if I/P converter ass�y goodand air passages not blocked. Check relay adjustment.

3q. Defective 67CFR regulator, supply pressure gaugejumps around.

3q. Replace 67CFR regulator.

4. ValveLink diagnostic testsprovide erroneous results.

4a. Bent or defective pressure sensor. 4a. Replace PWB.

4b. Pressure sensor O-ring missing. 4b. Replace O-ring.

5. Field Communicator doesnot turn on.

5a. Battery pack not charged. 5a. Charge battery pack. Note: Battery pack can be charged while attached to the Fieldcommunicator or separately. The 375 Field Communicator isfully operable while the battery pack is charging. Do notattempt to charge the battery pack in a hazardous area.

Checking Voltage Available

WARNING

Personal injury or property damagecaused by fire or explosion may occurif this test is attempted in an areawhich contains a potentially explosiveatmosphere or has been classified ashazardous.

To check the Voltage Available at the instrument,perform the following:

1. Connect the equipment in figure 2-17 to the fieldwiring in place of the FIELDVUE instrument.2. Set the control system to provide maximum outputcurrent.3. Set the resistance of the 1 kilohm potentiometershown in figure 2-17 to zero.4. Record the current shown on the milliammeter.5. Adjust the resistance of the 1 kilohm potentiometeruntil the voltage read on the voltmeter is 11.0 volts.6. Record the current shown on the milliammeter.7. If the current recorded in step 6 is the same as thatrecorded in step 4 (± 0.08 mA), the voltage available isadequate.8. If the voltage available is inadequate, refer toWiring Practices in the Installation section.

9

Maintenance

May 2007 9-5

Table 9-2. Tools RequiredTool Size Component

Phillips Screwdriver

Hex keyHex keyHex keyHex key

5 mm1.5 mm2.5 mm5 mm

Relay, printed wiring boardassembly, and cover screwsTerminal box screwTerminal box cover screwI/P converter screwsTravel sensor screws

Hex keyOpen-end wrenchHex keyOpen-end wrenchHex key

6 mm1/2-inch9/64-inch7/16-inch3/16-inch

Module base screwsConnector Arm screw (DVC6010)Feedback arm screwDVC6010 mounting boltsDVC6020 mounting bolts

Module Base Maintenance The digital valve controller contains a module baseconsisting of the I/P converter, printed wiring boardassembly, and pneumatic relay. The module base maybe easily replaced in the field without disconnectingfield wiring or tubing.

Tools RequiredTable 9-2 lists the tools required for maintaining theDVC6000 Series digital valve controller.

Removing the Module Base

WARNING

Refer to the Maintenance WARNING atthe beginning of this section.

To remove the module base perform the followingsteps. Refer to figures 10-1 through 10-4 for keynumber locations.

WARNING

To avoid personal injury or equipmentdamage from bursting of parts, turnoff the supply pressure to the digitalvalve controller and bleed off anyexcess supply pressure beforeattempting to remove the modulebase assembly from the housing.

1. For sliding-stem applications only, a protectiveshield for the feedback linkage is attached to the sideof the module base assembly (see figures 2-1

Figure 9-1. Printed Wiring Board Cable Connections

TERMINAL BOX

MODULE BASEASSEMBLY

PRINTED WIRINGBOARD ASSEMBLY

HOUSING

CABLE TOTERMINAL BOXW8073

CABLE TOTRAVEL SENSOR

and 2-2). Remove this shield and keep for reuse onthe replacement module. The replacement module willnot have this protective shield.

2. Unscrew the four captive screws in the cover(key 43) and remove the cover from the modulebase (key 2).

3. Using a 6 mm hex socket wrench, loosen thethree-socket head screws (key 38). These screwsare captive in the module base by retaining rings(key 154).

NoteThe module base is linked to thehousing by two cable assemblies.Disconnect these cableassemblies after you pull themodule base out of the housing.

4. Pull the module base straight out of the housing(key 1). Once clear of the housing, swing the modulebase to the side of the housing to gain access to thecable assemblies.

5. The digital valve controller has two cableassemblies, shown in figure 9-1, which connect themodule base, via the printed wiring board assembly, tothe travel sensor and the terminal box. Disconnectthese cable assemblies from the printed wiring boardassembly on the back of the module base.

9

DVC6000 SIS

May 20079-6

CAUTION

To avoid affecting performance of theinstrument, take care not to damagethe module base seal or guide surface.Do not bump or damage the bareconnector pins on the PWB assembly.Damaging either the module base orguide surface may result in materialdamage, which could compromise theinstruments ability to maintain apressure seal.

Replacing the Module Base To replace the module base perform the followingsteps. Refer to figures 10-1 through 10-4 for keynumber locations.

NoteInspect the guide surface on themodule and the corresponding seatingarea in the housing before installingthe module base assembly. To avoidaffecting performance of theinstrument these surfaces must be free of dust, dirt, scratches, andcontamination.

Ensure the module base seal is ingood condition. Do not reuse adamaged or worn seal.

1. Ensure the module base seal (key 237) is properlyinstalled in the housing (key 1). Ensure the O-ring (key 12) is in place on the module base assembly.

2. Connect the terminal box connector to the PWBassembly (key 50). Orientation of the connector isrequired.

3. Connect the travel sensor connector to the PWBassembly (key 50). Orientation of the connector isrequired.

4. Insert the module base (key 2) into the housing(key 1).

5. Install three socket head screws (key 38) in themodule base into the housing. If not already installed,press three retaining rings (key 154) into the modulebase. Evenly tighten the screws in a crisscross patternto a final torque of 16 N�m (138 lbf�in).

6. Attach the cover (key 43) to the module baseassembly.7. For sliding-stem applications only, install theprotective shield onto the side of the replacementmodule base assembly (see figures 2-1 and 2-2).

Submodule MaintenanceThe digital valve controller�s module base contains thefollowing submodules: I/P converter, PWB assembly,and pneumatic relay. If problems occur, thesesubmodules may be removed from the module baseand replaced with new submodules. After replacing asubmodule, the module base may be put back intoservice.

CAUTION

Exercise care when performingmaintenance on the module base.Reinstall the cover to protect the I/Pconverter and gauges when servicingother submodules.

In order to maintain accuracyspecifications, do not strike or dropthe I/P converter during submodulemaintenance.

I/P Converter

WARNING


Refer to figures 10-1 through 10-4 for key numberlocations. The I/P converter (key 41) is located on thefront of the module base.

NoteAfter I/P converter submodulereplacement, calibrate the digital valvecontroller to maintain accuracyspecifications.

Replacing the I/P Filter A screen in the supply port beneath the I/P converterserves as a secondary filter for the supply medium. Toreplace this filter, perform the following procedure:

9

Maintenance

May 2007 9-7

SCREEN (FILTER)LOCATED IN I/PCONVERTERSUPPLY PORT

Figure 9-2. I/P Filter Location

O-RING LOCATEDIN I/P CONVERTEROUTPUT PORT

W8072-1

1. Remove the I/P converter (key 41) and shroud (key 169) as described in the Removing the I/PConverter procedure.

2. Remove the screen (key 231) from the supply port.

3. Install a new screen in the supply port as shown infigure 9-2.

4. Inspect the O-ring (key 39) in the I/P output port. ifnecessary, replace it.

5. Reinstall the I/P converter (key 41) and shroud (key 169) as described in the Replacing the I/PConverter procedure.

Removing the I/P Converter 1. Remove the front cover (key 43), if not alreadyremoved.

2. Refer to figure 9-3. Using a 2.5 mm hex socketwrench, remove the four socket-head screws (key 23)that attach the shroud (key 169) and I/P converter(key 41) to the module base (key 2).

3. Remove the shroud (key 169); then pull the I/Pconverter (key 41) straight out of the module base(key 2). Be careful not to damage the two electricalleads that come out of the base of the I/P converter.

4. Ensure that the O-ring (key 39) and screen(key 231) stay in the module base and do not comeout with the I/P converter (key 41).

Replacing the I/P Converter 1. Refer to figure 9-2. Inspect the condition of theO-ring (key 39) and screen (key 231) in the modulebase (key 2). Replace them, if necessary. Applysilicone lubricant to the O-rings.

Figure 9-3. I/P Converter

SHROUD(KEY 169)

W8071

BOOTS(KEY 210)

SOCKET-HEADSCREWS (4)(KEY 23)I/P CONVERTER

(KEY 41)

2. Ensure the two boots (key 210) shown in figure 9-3are properly installed on the electrical leads.

3. Install the I/P converter (key 41) straight into themodule base (key 2), taking care that the two electricalleads feed into the guides in the module base. Theseguides route the leads to the printed wiring boardassembly submodule.

4. Install the shroud (key 169) over the I/P converter(key 41).

5. Install the four socket-head screws (key 23) andevenly tighten them in a crisscross pattern to a finaltorque of 1.6 N�m (14 lbf�in).

6. After replacing the I/P converter, calibrate travel orperform touch-up calibration to maintain accuracyspecifications.

PWB (Printed Wiring Board) AssemblyRefer to figures 10-1 through 10-4 for key numberlocations. The PWB assembly (key 50) is located onthe back of the module base assembly (key 2).

NoteIf the PWB assembly submodule isreplaced, calibrate and configure thedigital valve controller to maintainaccuracy specifications.

Removing the Printed Wiring BoardAssembly 1. Separate the module base from the housing byperforming the Removing the Module Base procedure.

9

DVC6000 SIS

May 20079-8

Figure 9-4. DVC6000 Series Digital Valve Controller DIP SwitchLocation

BACK OF PWB ASSEMBLYSUB-MODULE

DIP SWITCH

UP

DOWN

PINS REMOVED FOR CONNECTOR KEYING.

TRAVEL SENSORCONNECTOR

TERMINAL BOXCONNECTOR

Table 9-3. DIP Switch Configuration(1)

Operational Mode Switch Position

Multidrop Loop UP

Point-to-Point LoopDOWN

1. Refer to figure 9-4 for switch location.

2. Remove three screws (key 33).

3. Lift the PWB assembly (key 50) straight out of themodule base (key 2).

4. Ensure that the O-rings (key 40) remain in thepressure sensor bosses on the module base assembly(key 2) after the PWB assembly (key 50) has beenremoved.

Replacing the PWB Assembly and Settingthe DIP Switch 1. Apply silicone lubricant to the pressure sensorO-rings (key 40) and install them on the pressuresensor bosses in the module base assembly.

2. Properly orient the PWB assembly (key 50) as youinstall it into the module base. The two electrical leadsfrom the I/P converter (key 41) must guide into theirreceptacles in the PWB assembly and the pressuresensor bosses on the module base must fit into theirreceptacles in the PWB assembly.

3. Push the PWB assembly (key 50) into its cavity inthe module base.

4. Install and tighten three screws (key 33) to a torqueof 1 N�m (10.1 lbf�in).

5. Set the DIP switch on the PWB assemblyaccording to table 9-3.

NoteFor the digital valve controller tooperate with a 4 to 20 mA controlsignal, the DIP switch must be in thepoint-to-point loop position, as shownin table 9-3.

For the digital valve controller tooperate with a 24 VDC voltage controlsignal, the DIP switch must be in themultidrop loop position, as shown intable 9-3.

6. Reassemble the module base to the housing byperforming the Replacing the Module Base procedure.

7. Setup and calibrate the digital valve controller.

Pneumatic Relay

WARNING


Refer to figures 10-1 through 10-4 for key numberlocations. The pneumatic relay (key 24) is located onthe front of the module base.

NoteAfter relay submodule replacement,calibrate the digital valve controller tomaintain accuracy specifications.

Removing the Pneumatic Relay 1. Loosen the four screws that attach the relay (key 24) to the module base. These screws arecaptive in the relay.

2. Remove the relay.

9

Maintenance

May 2007 9-9

Figure 9-5. Pneumatic Relay AssemblyW8074

RELAY SEAL

Replacing the Pneumatic Relay 1. Visually inspect the holes in the module base toensure they are clean and free of obstructions. Ifcleaning is necessary, do not enlarge the holes.

2. Apply silicone lubricant to the relay seal andposition it in the grooves on the bottom of the relay asshown in figure 9-5. Press small seal retaining tabsinto retaining slots to hold relay seal in place.

3. Position the relay (with shroud) on the modulebase. Tighten the four screws, in a crisscross pattern,to a final torque of 2 N�m (20.7 lbf�in).

4. Using the Field Communicator, verify that the valuefor Relay Type parameter matches the relay typeinstalled.

5. After replacing the relay and verifying the relaytype, calibrate travel to maintain accuracyspecifications

Gauges, Pipe Plugs, or Tire Valves

WARNING


Depending on the options ordered, the DVC6000Series digital valve controller will be equipped witheither gauges (key 47), pipe plugs (key 66), or tirevalves (key 67). Single-acting direct instruments willalso have a screen (key 236, figure 10-4). These arelocated on the top of the module base next to therelay.

Perform the following procedure to replace thegauges, tire valves, or pipe plugs. Refer to figures10-1 through 10-4 for key number locations.

1. Remove the front cover (key 43).

2. Remove the gauge, pipe plug, or tire valve asfollows:

For gauges (key 47), the flats are on the gauge case.Use a wrench on the flats of the gauge to remove thegauge from the module base. For double-actinginstruments, to remove the supply gauge remove oneof the output gauges.

For pipe plugs (key 66) and tire valves (key 67),use a wrench to remove these from the module base.

3. Apply sealant (key 64) to the threads of thereplacement gauges, pipe plugs, or tire valves.

4. Using a wrench, screw the gauges, pipe plugs, ortire valves into the module base.

Terminal BoxRefer to figures 10-1 through 10-4 for key numberlocations.

The terminal box is located on the housing andcontains the terminal strip assembly for field wiringconnections.

Removing the Terminal Box

WARNING

To avoid personal injury or propertydamage caused by fire or explosion,remove power to the instrumentbefore removing the terminal boxcover in an area which contains apotentially explosive atmosphere orhas been classified as hazardous.

1. Loosen the set screw (key 58) in the cap (key 4) sothat the cap can be unscrewed from the terminal box.

2. After removing the cap (key 4), note the location offield wiring connections and disconnect the field wiringfrom the terminal box.

3. Separate the module base from the housing byperforming the Removing the Module Base procedure.

4. Remove the screw (key 72). Pull the terminal boxassembly straight out of the housing.

9

DVC6000 SIS

May 20079-10

5. Remove two wire retainers (key 44), internal andexternal to the terminal box.

Replacing the Terminal Box

NoteInspect all O-rings for wear andreplace as necessary.

1. Install two wire retainers (key 44), internal andexternal to the terminal box.

2. Apply silicone lubricant to the O-ring (key 35) andinstall the O-ring over the stem of the terminal box.

3. Insert the terminal box assembly stem into thehousing until it bottoms out. Position the terminal boxassembly so that the hole for the screw (key 72) in theterminal box aligns with the threaded hole in thehousing. Install the screw (key 72).

4. Connect the terminal box connector to the PWBassembly (key 50). Orientation of the connector isrequired.

5. Reassemble the module base to the housing byperforming the Replacing the Module Base procedure.

6. Reconnect the field wiring as noted in step 2 in theRemoving the Terminal Box procedure.

7. Apply silicone lubricant to the O-ring (key 36) andinstall the O-ring over the 2-5/8 inch threads of theterminal box. Use of a tool is recommended to preventcutting the O-ring while installing it over the threads.

8. Apply lubricant (key 63) to the 2-5/8 inch threadson the terminal box to prevent seizing or galling whenthe cap is installed.

9. Screw the cap (key 4) onto the terminal box.

10. Install a set screw (key 58) into the cap (key 4).Loosen the cap (not more than 1 turn) to align the setscrew over one of the recesses in the terminal box.Tighten the set screw (key 58).

11. Apply sealant (key 64) to the conduit entranceplug (key 62) and install it into the unused conduitentry of the terminal box.

Travel Sensor

WARNING


Replacing the travel sensor requires removing thedigital valve controller from the actuator.

WARNING

To avoid personal injury or propertydamage caused by fire or explosion,remove power to the instrumentbefore removing the potentiometer inan area which contains a potentiallyexplosive atmosphere or has beenclassified as hazardous.

Disassembly

NoteIf the feedback arm (key 79) orfeedback arm assembly (key 84) isremoved from the digital valvecontroller, the travel sensor (key 77)must be recalibrated.

DVC6010 Digital Valve ControllerRefer to figure 10-1 for key number locations.

1. Remove piping and fittings from the instrument.

2. Disconnect the adjustment arm from the connectorarm and the feedback arm (see figures 2-1 and 2-2).

3. Remove the instrument from the actuator.

4. Loosen the screw (key 80) that secures thefeedback arm (key 79) to the travel sensor shaft.

5. Remove the feedback arm (key 79) from the travelsensor shaft.


7. Remove the screw (key 72) that fastens the travelsensor assembly to the housing.

9

Maintenance

May 2007 9-11

8. Pull the travel sensor assembly (key 223) straightout of the housing.

DVC6020 Digital Valve ControllerRefer to figure 10-2 for key number locations.


2. Remove the digital valve controller from theactuator.

3. Disconnect the bias spring (key 82) from thefeedback arm assembly (key 84) and the armassembly (key 91). Remove the mounting bracket (key 74) from the back of the digital controller.

4. Loosen the screw (key 80) that secures the armassembly to the travel sensor shaft.

5. Remove the arm assembly (key 91) from the travelsensor assembly (key 77) shaft.


7. Remove the screw (key 72) that fastens the travelsensor assembly to the housing.

8. Pull the travel sensor assembly (key 223) straightout of the housing.

Type DVC6030 Digital Valve ControllerRefer to figure 10-3 for key number locations.


2. Remove the digital valve controller from theactuator. Loosen the screw (key 80) that secures thefeedback arm (key 79) to the travel sensor shaft.Remove the feedback arm from the travel sensorshaft.


4. From within the housing, unscrew the travel sensorassembly (key 223) from the housing.

Assembly

NoteIf the feedback arm (key 79) orfeedback arm assembly (key 84) isremoved from the digital valvecontroller, the travel sensor (key 77)must be recalibrated.


1. Insert the travel sensor assembly (key 223) into thehousing (key 1). Secure the travel sensor assemblywith screw (key 72).

2. Connect the travel sensor connector to the PWB asdescribed in the Replacing the Module Baseprocedure.

3. Loosely assemble the bias spring (key 78), screw(key 80), plain washer (key 163), and nut (key 81) tothe feedback arm (key 79), if not already installed.

4. Attach the feedback arm (key 79) to the travelsensor shaft.

Two methods are available for adjusting the travelsensor. You can use a multimeter to measure thepotentiometer resistance, or if you have a FieldCommunicator, you can use the procedure in theCalibration section. To use the multimeter, performsteps 5 through 11. To use the Field Communicator,skip to step 12.

Travel Sensor Adjustment with a Multimeter

5. Align the feedback arm (key 79) to the housing(key 1) by inserting the alignment pin (key 46) throughthe hole marked �A� on the feedback arm. Fullyengage the alignment pin into the tapped hole in theside of the housing. Position the feedback arm so thatthe surface is flush with the end of the travel sensorshaft.

6. Connect a multimeter set to a resistance range of 3000 ohms to pins 2 and 3 of the travel sensorconnector. Refer to figure 9-6 for pin location.

7. Adjust the travel sensor shaft to obtain a measuredresistance of 1950 to 2050 ohms.

NoteIn the next step, be sure the feedbackarm surface remains flush with the endof the travel sensor shaft.

8. While observing the resistance, tighten the screw(key 80) to secure the feedback arm to the travelsensor shaft. Be sure the resistance reading remainswithin the range listed in step 7. Paint the screw todiscourage tampering with the connection.

9. Disconnect the multimeter from the travel sensorconnector.

10. Connect the travel sensor connector to the PWBas described in Replacing the Module Base.

9

DVC6000 SIS

May 20079-12

NOTE: THE POTENTIOMETER RESISTANCE BETWEEN PINS 2 AND 3 CAN BEMEASURED AT THE CONNECTOR. INSERT TWO SHORT LENGTHS OF22 AWG WIRE INTO THE PIN 2 AND 3 RECEPTACLES IN THE CONNECTOR.CLIP ON LEADS FROM A DVM (DIGITAL VOLTMETER) TO MEASURE THERESISTANCE.

PIN 3

KEYED

PIN 2

CW1

3

A6481/IL

1

1

Figure 9-6. Potentiometer Resistance Measurement

11. Travel sensor replacement is complete. Install thedigital valve controller on the actuator.

Travel Sensor Adjustment with the FieldCommunicator

The next two steps do not apply if you used amultimeter to adjust the travel sensor. Perform thesesteps only if you elected to adjust the travel sensorusing the Field Communicator.


13. Perform the appropriate Travel Sensor Adjustprocedure in the Calibration section.


1. Insert the travel sensor assembly (key 223) into thehousing. Secure the travel sensor assembly withscrew (key 72).

2. Connect the travel sensor connector to the PWB asdescribed in Replacing the Module Base.

3. Loosely assemble the screw (key 80), plain washer(key 163), and nut (key 81) to the arm assembly (key 91), if not already installed.

4. Attach the arm assembly (key 91) to the travelsensor assembly (key 223) shaft.

Two methods are available for adjusting the travelsensor. You can use a multimeter to measure thepotentiometer resistance, or if you have a FieldCommunicator, you can use the procedure in theCalibration section. To use the multimeter, performsteps 5 through 15. To use the Field Communicator,skip to step 16.


5. Connect a multimeter set to a resistance range of7000 ohms to pins 2 and 3 of the travel sensorconnector. Refer to figure 9-6 for pin location.

9

Maintenance

May 2007 9-13

6. Hold the arm assembly (key 91) in a fixed positionso that the arm is parallel to the housing back planeand pointing toward the terminal box. Position the armassembly so that the outer surface is flush with theend of the travel sensor shaft.


NoteIn the next step, be sure the armassembly outer surface remains flushwith the end of the travel sensor shaft.



10. Apply lubricant (key 64 or equivalent) to the pinportion of the arm assembly (key 91).

11. Position the mounting bracket over the back of thedigital valve controller. Push the feedback armassembly (key 84) toward the housing and engage thepin of the arm assembly into the slot in the feedbackarm.

12. Install the mounting bracket (key 74).

13. Install the bias spring (key 82) as shown infigure 9-7.


15. Travel sensor replacement is complete. Install thedigital valve controller on the actuator.





Figure 9-7. Type DVC6020 digital Valve Controller, bias Spring(key 82) Installation

BIAS SPRING(KEY 82)

ARM ASSEMBLY(KEY 91)

FEEDBACKARMASSEMBLY(KEY 84)

NOTE:INSTALL BIAS SPRING WITH SMALLER DIAMETER HOOK CONNECTED TO ARM ASSEMBLY (KEY 91) AND WITH BOTH HOOKOPENINGS TOWARD CENTER OF BRACKET.

Type DVC6030 Digital Valve ControllerRefer to figure 10-3 for key number locations.1. Apply lubricant (key 63) to the travel sensorassembly threads.2. Screw the travel sensor assembly (key 223) intothe housing until it is tight.3. Connect the travel sensor connector to the PWB asdescribed in the Replacing the Module Baseprocedure.

4. Loosely assemble the bias spring (key 78), screw(key 80), plain washer (key 163), and nut (key 81) tothe feedback arm (key 79), if not already installed.5. Attach the feedback arm (key 79) to the travelsensor shaft.Two methods are available for adjusting the travelsensor. You can use a multimeter to measure thepotentiometer resistance, or if you have a FieldCommunicator, you can use the procedure in theCalibration section. To use the multimeter, performsteps 6 through 12. To use the Field Communicator,skip to step 13.


6. Align the feedback arm (key 79) to the housing(key 1) by inserting the alignment pin (key 46) throughthe hole marked �A� on the feedback arm. Fullyengage the alignment pin into the tapped hole in thehousing. Position the feedback arm so that the outersurface is flush with the end of the travel sensor shaft.

9

DVC6000 SIS

May 20079-14

7. Connect a multimeter set to a resistance range of3000 ohms to pins 2 and 3 of the travel sensorconnector. Refer to figure 9-6 for pin location.


NoteIn the next step, be sure the feedbackarm outer surface remains flush withthe end of the travel sensor shaft.




12. Travel sensor replacement is complete. Install thedigital valve controller on the actuator as described inthe Installation section.





9

Parts

May 2007 10-1

10-10

Section 10 Parts

Parts Ordering 10-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parts Kits 10-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parts List 10-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Housing 10-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Common Parts 10-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Module Base 10-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I/P Assembly 10-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Relay 10-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Terminal Box 10-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PWB Assembly 10-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pressure Gauges, Pipe Plugs, or Tire Valve Assemblies 10-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Feedback / Remote Travel Parts 10-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LC340 Line Conditioner 10-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10

DVC6000 SIS

May 200710-2

Parts Ordering Whenever corresponding with your Emerson ProcessManagement sales office about this equipment,always mention the controller serial number. Whenordering replacement parts, refer to the 11-characterpart number of each required part as found in thefollowing parts list. Parts which do not show partnumbers are not orderable.

WARNING

Use only genuine Fisher replacementparts. Components that are notsupplied by Emerson ProcessManagement should not, under anycircumstances, be used in any Fisherinstrument. Use of components notsupplied by Emerson ProcessManagement will void your warranty,might adversely affect theperformance of the valve, and couldgive rise to personal injury andproperty damage.

NoteNeither Emerson, Emerson ProcessManagement, nor any of their affiliatedentities assumes responsibility for theselection, use, and maintenance of anyproduct. Responsibility for the selection,use, and maintenance of any productremains with the purchaser andend-user.

NoteAll part numbers are for bothaluminum and stainless steelconstructions, unless otherwiseindicated.

NoteThe stainless steel option is availablefor Safety Instrumented Systems,however, TÜV approval is still inprogress. Contact your EmersonProcess Management sales office foradditional information.

Parts Kits Conversion kit 3 listed below provides the partsrequired to convert a DVC6010 to a DVC6020.Conversion kit 4 provides the parts required to converta DVC6020 to a DVC6010.

Kit Description Part Number1* Elastomer Spare Parts Kit (kit contains parts to

service one digital valve controller) 19B5402X0122* Small Hardware Spare Parts Kit (kit contains parts

to service one digital valve controller) 19B5403X0123 Conversion Kit (DVC6010 to DVC6020 )

Also see note below 19B5405X012

Note

When converting a DVC6010 to a DVC6020 forpipe-away construction, also order pipe-away bracketkit, item 6.

4 Conversion Kit (DVC6020 to DVC6010) 14B5072X1125 Alignment Pin Kit

[kit contains 15 alignment pins (key 46)] 14B5072X0926 Pipe-Away Bracket Kit (DVC6020) [kit contains

mounting bracket (key 74) and O-ring (key 75)] 19B5404X0127* Seal Screen Kit

[kit contains 25 seal screens (key 231)and 25 O-rings (key 39)] 14B5072X182

8 Terminal Box Kit, aluminum 19B5401X0129* I/P Converter Kit 38B6041X092

10

*Recommended spare

Parts

May 2007 10-3

Kit Description Part Number10 Vent with extension

For a DVC6020 replacing a DVC5020on an existing mounting 19B3407X012

11 Adjustment Arm Kit(includes washer, nut and adjustment arm 14B5072X132

12* PTFE Sleeve Kit[For pot bushing assembly (kit includes 10 sleeves andLubricant)]

DVC6010 and DVC6020 GE08726X012DVC6030 GE08727X012

13* Spare Module Base Assembly Kit, aluminum[kit contains module base (key 2); drive screws, qty. 2,(key 11); shield/label (key 19); hex socket cap screw, qty. 3, (key 38); self tapping screw, qty. 2 (key 49); pipe plug, qty. 3 (key 61); retaining ring, qty. 3 (key 154); screen (key 236); and flame arrestors, qty. 3 (key 243)]

GE18654X012

14* Spare Housing Assembly Kit, aluminum[kit contains housing (key 1); drive screw, qty. 2 (key 11); shield (key 20); and screen (key 271)]

DVC6010/DVC6020 GE18652X012DVC6030 GE18653X012

15 DVC6020 Cam Adjustment Tool GE12742X012

Safety Instrumented System Kits

16 SIS Preventative Maintenance KitsDVC6010 and DVC6020 19B4032X012DVC6030 19B4031X012

Severe Service Linkage Kits

Note

All metallic parts (except coil springs) in the corrosionkit and parts that experience rubbing or wear in thewear kit are coated with a proprietary tungsten carboncoating.

22 Corrosion KitDVC6010 0.75−2 Inch travel GE22667X012DVC6010 2−4 Inch travel GE22668X012DVC6020 short arm GE22670X012DVC6020 long arm GE22671X012DVC6030 rotary GE22672X012DVC6030 linear GE22673X012

Wear KitDVC6010 0.75−2 Inch travel GE22674X012DVC6010 2−4 Inch travel GE22675X012DVC6020 short arm GE22676X012DVC6020 long arm GE22677X012DVC6030 rotary GE22678X012DVC6030 linear GE22679X012

Parts ListParts which do not show part numbers are notorderable as individual parts. In most cases, they areavailable in one of the parts kits listed under PartsKits.

NoteParts with footnote numbers shownare available in parts kits. Also seefootnote information at the bottom ofthe page.

Key Description Part Number

HousingDVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030 (see figures 10-1,10-2, and 10-3)

1 Housing(14)

11 Drive Screw(14) (2 req�d)20 Shield(14)

52 Vent, plastic(2) DVC6010 and DVC6030 only74 Mounting Bracket

DVC6020 Std(3) or pipe-away(6)

75* O-Ring(6), DVC6020 only245 Pipe Plug, pl stl(6), DVC6020 Vent-away only271 Screen(14)

Common Parts(see figures 10-1, 10-2, and 10-3)16* O-ring(1,16) (3 req�d)23 Cap Screw, hex socket, SST(2) (4 req�d)29 Warning label, for use only with LCIE hazardous area

classifications33 Mach Screw, pan hd, SST(2) (3 req�d)38 Cap Screw, hex socket, SST(2,13) (3 req�d)43* Cover Assembly (includes cover screws) 38B9580X02248 Nameplate49 Screw, self tapping (2 req�d)(13)

63 Lithium grease (not furnished with the instrument)64 Anti-seize compound (not furnished with the instrument)65 Lubricant, silicone sealant (not furnished with the instrument)

154 Retaining Ring(2) (3 req�d)237 Module Base Seal(1,16)

10

*Recommended spare2. Available in the Small Hardware Spare Parts Kit3. Available in the DVC6010 to DVC6020 Conversion Kit6. Available in the Pipe-Away Bracket Kit

14. Available in the Spare Housing Assembly Kit

DVC6000 SIS

May 200710-4


Module Base (see figures 10-1, 10-2, 10-3, and 10-4)

2 Module Base(13)

11 Drive Screw(13) (2 req�d)12 O-ring(1,16)

19 Label, Shield Assembly(13)

61 Pipe Plug, hex socket(13) (3 req�d)236 Screen, for single-acting direct units only(13)

243 Flame Arrestor Assy(13) (3 req�d)

I/P Converter Assembly(see figures 10-1, 10-2, and 10-3)39* O-ring (1,7,9,16)

41 I/P Converter(9,16)

169 Shroud(9,16)

210* Boot, nitrile(1,9,16) (2 req�d) (also see figure 9-3)231* Seal Screen(1,7,9,16)

Relay (see figures 10-1, 10-2, and 10-3)24* Relay Assembly(16), (includes shroud, relay seal, mounting

screws)Low Bleed, nitrileRelay A, double-acting 38B5786X072

Note

Relay B and C are not TÜV approved.

Relay B, single-acting reverse 38B5786X112Relay C, single-acting direct 38B5786X152

Terminal Box (see figures 10-1, 10-2, and 10-3)

4 Terminal Box Cap34* O-ring(1,8,16)

36* O-ring(1,8,16)

44 Wire Retainer, pl stl(2) (6 req�d) (not shown)

Key Description Part Number58 Set Screw, hex socket, SST(2)

72 Cap Screw, hex socket, SST(2)

164 Terminal Box Assembly(8)

246 SIS Label247 TÜV Approval Label

PWB AssemblyDVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030(see figures 10-1, 10-2, and 10-3)

Note

Contact your Emerson Process Management salesoffice for PWB Assembly FS numbers.

50* PWB Assembly

Pressure Gauges, Pipe Plugs, or TireValve Assemblies (see figure 10-4)47* Pressure Gauge, nickel-plated brass case, brass connection

Double-acting (3 req�d); Single-acting (2 req�d)PSI/MPA Gauge ScaleTo 60 PSI, 0.4 MPa 18B7713X042To 160 PSI, 1.1 MPa 18B7713X022

PSI/bar Gauge ScaleTo 60 PSI, 4 bar 18B7713X032To 160 PSI, 11 bar 18B7713X012

66 Pipe Plug, hex hdFor double-acting and single acting direct w/gauges(none req�d)

For single-acting reverse w/gauges (1 req�d)For all units w/o gauges (3 req�d)

67 Tire Valve Assembly (3 req�d)

10

*Recommended spare1. Available in the Elastomer Spare Parts Kit2. Available in the Small Hardware Spare Parts Kit7. Available in the Seal Screen Kit8. Available in the Terminal Box Kit9. Available in the I/P Converter Kit

13. Available in the Spare Module Base Assembly Kit16. Available in the SIS Preventative Maintenance Kit

*Recommended spare2. Available in the Small Hardware Spare Parts Kit3. Available in the DVC6010 to DVC6020 Conversion Kit4. Available in the DVC6020 to DVC6010 Conversion Kit5. Available in the Alignment Pin Kit

16. Available in the SIS Preventative Maintenance Kit

Parts

May 2007 10-5


Feedback Parts Common Feedback Parts(see figures 10-1, 10-2, and 10-3)46 Alignment Pin(5)

for Type DVC6010 and DVC603064 Anti-seize compound (not furnished with the instrument)65 Lubricant, silicone sealant (not furnished with the instrument)72 Cap Screw, hex socket(2) (2 req�d)

for Type DVC6010 and DVC602078 Bias Spring, SST(2)

for Type DVC6010 and DVC603079 Feedback Arm

for Type DVC6010 and DVC603080 Cap Screw, hex socket, SST(2)

81 Square Nut, SST(2)

104 Cap Screw, hex hd (4 req�d) Aluminum ConstructionDVC6010 onlyNot for mounting on 1250 and 1250R actuators.Mounting parts for 1250 and 1250R actuators areincluded in the mounting kit for these actuators.

Stainless Steel ConstructionDVC6010 (oversized) (4 req�d)Not for mounting on 1250 and 1250R actuators.

107 Mounting Bracket(4), DVC6010 onlyNot for mounting on 1250 and 1250R actuators.Mounting parts for 1250 and 1250R actuators areincluded in the mounting kit for these actuators.

- - - Feedback Linkage Shield, see figures 2-1 and 2-2Up to 50.4 mm (2-inch) travelAll sliding-stem actuators except 585C size 60

50.4 mm (2-inch) to 104mm (4-inch) travelAll sliding-stem actuators except 585C size 60

Type 585C size 60, 19 mm (0.75 inch) to 104mm (4-inch) travel163 Plain Washer, SST(2)

223* Potentiometer/Bushing Assy(16)

Standard ElastomersDVC6010, DVC6020 18B9576X012DVC6030 17B4030X032


DVC6020 (see figure 10-2)74 Mounting Bracket82 Bias Spring, SST(3)

83 Bearing Flange, PTFE-based(3) (2 req�d)84 Feedback Arm Assy, SST(3)

85 E-ring, pl stl(3) (2 req�d)86 Plain Washer, pl stl(3) (2 req�d)87 Follower Post, SST(3)

88 Roller, SST/PTFE(3)

89 Spring Lock Washer, pl stl(3)

90 Hex Nut, pl stl(3)

91 Arm Assy, SST92 Cap Screw, hex socket(3) (4 req�d)93 Torsion Spring, Feedback Arm(3)

Line ConditionerLC340 Line conditioner 39B5416X012

10

DVC6000 SIS

May 200710-6

Figure 10-1. Type DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller Assembly

APPLY LUB, SEALANT

SECTION A-A

SECTION E-E

E E

SECTION D-D

1

1

NOTES:SEE FIGURE 10-4 FOR GAUGE CONFIGURATIONS

2. APPLY LUBRICANT KEY 65 TO ALL O-RINGS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

OUTPUT A

OUTPUT BSUPPLY

SECTION C-C

A

A

48B7710 K SHT 1 & 2 / DOC

11

11

19

20

27161

49

64

243

246

247

10

Parts

May 2007 10-7


APPLY LUB, SEALANT

SECTION B-B

SECTION C-C

SECTION A-A

SECTION D-D

SECTION E-E

A

A

DDE E

C C

B

B

48B9596-K/IL SHT 1 & 2 / DOC

H

H

SECTION H-H


246

247

10

DVC6000 SIS

May 200710-8

Figure 10-2. Type DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller Assembly (continued)

APPLY LUB, SEALANTNOTES:

SEE FIGURE 10-4 FOR GAUGE CONFIGURATIONS2. APPLY LUBRICANT KEY 65 TO ALL O-RINGS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

1

1

48B9596-K SHT 3 / DOC

61

64

10

Parts

May 2007 10-9

NOTES:SEE FIGURE 10-4 FOR GAUGE CONFIGURATIONS



SECTION C-C

APPLY LUB, SEALANT, THREAD LOCK

SECTION A-A

SECTION D-D

SECTION B-B

1

1

OUTPUT A

SUPPLY

OUTPUT B

48B9597-K SHT 1 & 2 / DOC

A

A

C C

B B

D D

11

11

19

20

61

49

64

271

243

246

247

10

DVC6000 SIS

May 200710-10

Figure 10-4. Typical DVC6000 Series Digital Valve Controller Gauge Configuration

APPLY LUB, SEALANT

SINGLE-ACTING DIRECT SINGLE-ACTING REVERSEDOUBLE-ACTING

2

1

NOTE:FOR SINGLE-ACTING DIRECT, OUTPUT B IS PLUGGED.FOR SINGLE-ACTING REVERSE, OUTPUT A IS PLUGGED.

1

2

48B7710-G SHT 2 / DOC

10


May 2007 11-1

11-11

Section 11 Loop Schematics/NameplatesCSA Schematic 11-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSA Nameplate 11-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FM Schematic 11-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FM Nameplate 11-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ATEX Nameplate; Intrinsic Safety, Dust-Tight 11-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ATEX Nameplate; Flameproof, Dust-Tight 11-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ATEX Nameplate; Type n, Dust-Tight 11-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

IECEx Nameplate 11-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NEPSI Nameplate 11-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11

DVC6000 SIS

May 200711-2

This section includes loop schematics required forwiring of intrinsically safe installations. It also containsthe approvals nameplates. If you have any questions,contact your Emerson Process Management salesoffice.

29B3428-B / DOC

Figure 11-1. CSA Schematic for Type DVC6000 and Type DVC6000S

TYPE DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, DVC6010S, DVC6020S, DVC6030S

Figure 11-2. CSA Nameplate

11


May 2007 11-3

29B3427-A / DOC

Figure 11-3. FM Schematic for Type DVC6000 and Type DVC6000S


Figure 11-4. FM Nameplates

11

DVC6000 SIS

May 200711-4


Figure 11-5. ATEX Nameplate; Intrinsic Safety, Dust-Tight


Figure 11-6. ATEX Nameplate; Flameproof, Dust-Tight


Figure 11-7. ATEX Nameplate; Type n, Dust-Tight

11


May 2007 11-5


Figure 11-8. IECEx Nameplate; Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Flameproof

TYPE DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030

Figure 11-9. NEPSI Nameplate; Intrinsic Safety, Dust; Flameproof, Dust

11

DVC6000 SIS

May 200711-6

11

Glossary

May 2007 Glossary-1

L-L-

GlossaryAlert Point

An adjustable value that, when exceeded,activates an alert.

AlgorithmA set of logical steps to solve a problem oraccomplish a task. A computer program containsone or more algorithms.

AlphanumericConsisting of letters and numbers.

Analog Input UnitsUnits in which the analog input is displayed andmaintained in the instrument.

ANSI (acronym)The acronym ANSI stands for the AmericanNational Standards Institute

ANSI ClassValve pressure/temperature rating.

Auto TestThe digital valve controller can be configured toautomatically run the partial stroke test.

Auxiliary Input AlertChecks the status of the auxiliary input; a discreteinput. When enabled, the Auxiliary Input Alert isactive when the auxiliary input terminals are openor closed (shorted), depending upon the selectionfor Auxiliary Input Alert State.

Auxiliary Terminal (Indicator)Indicates whether auxiliary wiring terminals areopen or closed (such as by an external switchcontact).

Bench SetPressure, supplied to an actuator, required todrive the actuator through rated valve travel.Expressed in pounds per square inch.

ByteA unit of binary digits (bits). A byte consists ofeight bits.

Calibration LocationWhere the instrument was last calibrated; eitherin the factory or in the field.

ConfigurationStored instructions and operating parameters fora FIELDVUE instrument.

Control LoopAn arrangement of physical and electroniccomponents for process control. The electroniccomponents of the loop continuously measureone or more aspects of the process, then alterthose aspects as necessary to achieve a desiredprocess condition. A simple control loopmeasures only one variable. More sophisticatedcontrol loops measure many variables andmaintain specified relationships among thosevariables.

Control ModeDefines where the instrument reads its set point.The following control modes are available for aFIELDVUE instrument:Analog The instrument receives its travel setpoint over the 4−20 mA loop. Digital The instrument receives its set pointdigitally, via the HART communications link.Test This is not a user-selectable mode. TheField Communicator or AMS ValveLink Softwareplaces the instrument in this mode whenever itneeds to move the valve, such as for calibrationor diagnostic tests.

Control Mode, RestartDetermines the instrument control mode after arestart. See Control Mode for the available restartcontrol modes.

12GlossaryGlossaryGlossary

DVC6000 SIS

May 2007Glossary-2

ControllerA device that operates automatically to regulate acontrolled variable.

Crossover PointThe point at which the feedback pin is closest tothe axis of rotation of the travel sensor. A visualindication of the crossover point is found whenthe slot in the instrument feedback arm forms a90-degree angle with the valve stem.

Current-to-Pressure (I/P) ConverterAn electronic component or device that convertsa milliamp signal to a proportional pneumaticpressure output signal.

Cycle CounterThe capability of a FIELDVUE instrument torecord the number of times the travel changesdirection. The change in direction must occurafter the deadband has been exceeded before itcan be counted as a cycle.

Cycle Counter AlertChecks the difference between the Cycle Counterand the Cycle Counter Alert Point. Cycle CounterAlert is active when the cycle counter valueexceeds the Cycle Counter Alert Point. It clearsafter you reset the Cycle Counter to a value lessthan the alert point.

Cycle Counter Alert PointAn adjustable value which, when exceeded,activates the Cycle Counter Alert. Valid entriesare 0 to 4 billion cycles.

Cycle Counter DeadbandRegion around the travel reference point, inpercent of ranged travel, established at the lastincrement of the Cycle Counter. The deadbandmust be exceeded before a change in travel canbe counted as a cycle. Valid entries are 0% to100%. Typical value is between 2% and 5%.

DeviationUsually, the difference between set point andprocess variable. More generally, any departurefrom a desired or expected value or pattern.

Device IDUnique identifier embedded in the instrument atthe factory.

Device RevisionRevision number of the interface software thatpermits communication between the FieldCommunicator and the instrument.

Drive SignalThe signal to the I/P converter from the printedwiring board. It is the percentage of the totalmicroprocessor effort needed to drive the valvefully open.

Drive Signal AlertChecks the drive signal and calibrated travel. Ifone of the following conditions exists for morethan 20 seconds, the Drive Signal Alert is active.If none of the conditions exist, the alert is cleared.If Zero Power Condition = Closed

The alert is active when:

drive signal <10% and calibrated travel >3%

drive signal >90% and calibrated travel <97%

If Zero Power Condition = Open

The alert is active when:

drive signal <10% and calibrated travel <97%

drive signal >90% and calibrated travel >3%

DVC Power UpDefines the power up behavior of the DVC6000.Auto Reset allows the valve to track thecommand signal when power is applied to thedevice. Manual Reset will lock the device in itssafety position until the digital valve controller isreset.

Equal PercentageA valve flow characteristic where equalincrements of valve stem travel produce equalpercentage changes in existing flow. One of theinput characteristics available for a FIELDVUEdigital valve controller. See also, Linear andQuick Opening.

Feedback ArmThe mechanical connection between the valvestem linkage and the FIELDVUE digital valvecontroller travel sensor.

Feedback ConnectionIdentifies the type of feedback linkage: rotary,sliding-stem roller or sliding-stem standard.

12Glossary

Glossary

May 2007 Glossary-3

Feedback SignalIndicates to the instrument the actual position ofthe valve. The travel sensor provides thefeedback signal to the instrument printed wiringboard assembly. A mechanical linkage connectsthe travel sensor to the valve stem or shaft.

Firmware RevisionThe revision number of the instrument firmware.Firmware is a program that is entered into theinstrument at time of manufacture and cannot bechanged by the user.

Free TimePercent of time that the microprocessor is idle. Atypical value is 25%. The actual value dependson the number of functions in the instrument thatare enabled and on the amount of communicationcurrently in progress.

Full Ranged TravelCurrent, in mA, that corresponds with the pointwhere ranged travel is maximum, i.e., limited bythe mechanical travel stops.

GainThe ratio of output change to input change.

Hardware RevisionRevision number of the instrument hardware. Thephysical components of the instrument aredefined as the hardware.

HART (acronym)The acronym HART stands for HighwayAddressable Remote Transducer.

HART TagAn eight-character name that identifies thephysical instrument.

HART Universal RevisionRevision number of the HART UniversalCommands which are the communicationsprotocol for the instrument.

Input CharacteristicThe relationship between the ranged travel andranged input. Possible values include: linear,equal percentage, and quick opening.

Input CurrentThe current signal from the control system thatserves as the analog input to the instrument. Seealso Input Signal.

Input RangeThe analog input signal range that corresponds tothe travel range.

Input SignalThe current signal from the control system. Theinput signal can be displayed in milliamperes or inpercent of ranged input.

Instrument LevelDetermines the functions available for theinstrument.

Instrument ModeDetermines if the instrument responds to itsanalog input signal. There are two instrumentmodes:In Service: For a fully functioning instrument, theinstrument output changes in response to analoginput changes. Typically changes to setup orcalibration cannot be made when the instrumentmode is In Service.Out of Service: The instrument output does notchange in response to analog input changeswhen the instrument mode is Out of Service.Some setup parameters can be changed onlywhen the instrument mode is Out of Service.

Instrument ProtectionDetermines if commands from a HART devicecan calibrate and/or configure certain parametersin the instrument. There are two types ofinstrument protection:Configuration and Calibration: Prohibitschanging protected setup parameters; prohibitscalibration.None: Permits both configuration and calibration.The instrument is �unprotected.�

Instrument Serial NumberThe serial number assigned to the printed wiringboard by the factory but can be changed duringsetup. The instrument serial number shouldmatch the serial number on the instrumentnameplate.

12Glossary

DVC6000 SIS

May 2007Glossary-4

Leak ClassDefines the allowable leakage by a valve when itis closed. Leak class numbers are listed in twostandards: ANSI/FCI 70-2 and IEC 534-4.

LinearA valve flow characteristic where changes in flowrate are directly proportional to changes in valvestem travel. One of the input characteristicsavailable for a FIELDVUE digital valve controller.See also, Equal Percentage and Quick Opening.

Linearity, dynamicLinearity (independent) is the maximum deviationfrom a straight line best fit to the opening andclosing curves and a line representing theaverage value of those curves.

Local Control PanelThe LCP100 local control panel is used with theFIELDVUE DVC6000 SIS digital valve controller.This panel is used to monitor and manually openand close a safety shutdown valve. The LCP100also provides a manual reset feature and a buttonfor initiating a partial stroke test.

Manual ResetThe DVC6000 Series digital valve controller inSIS applications can be configured to hold the tripstate until a local reset button is pressed.

MemoryA type of semiconductor used for storingprograms or data. FIELDVUE instruments usethree types of memory: Random Access Memory(RAM), Read Only Memory (ROM), andNon-Volatile Memory (NVM). See also theselistings in this glossary.

MenuA list of programs, commands, or other activitiesthat you select by using the arrow keys tohighlight the item then pressing ENTER, or byentering the numeric value of the menu item.

Minimum Closing TimeMinimum time, in seconds, for the travel todecrease through the entire ranged travel. Thisrate is applied to any travel decrease. Validentries are 0 to 400 seconds. Deactivate byentering a value of 0 seconds.

Minimum Opening TimeMinimum time, in seconds, for the travel toincrease through the entire ranged travel. Thisrate is applied to any travel increase. Because offriction, actual valve travel may not respond inexactly the same time frame. Valid entries are 0to 400 seconds. Deactivate by entering a value of0 seconds.

Non-Volatile Memory (NVM)A type of semiconductor memory that retains itscontents even though power is disconnected.NVM contents can be changed duringconfiguration unlike ROM which can be changedonly at time of instrument manufacture. NVMstores configuration restart data.

ParallelSimultaneous: said of data transmission on two ormore channels at the same time.

Polling AddressAddress of the instrument. If the digital valvecontroller is used in a point-to-point configuration,set the polling address to 0. If it is used in amultidrop configuration, or split range application,set the polling address to a value from 0 to 15.

Pressure SensorA FIELDVUE instrument internal device thatsenses pneumatic pressure. DVC6000 Seriesdigital valve controllers have three pressuresensors: one to sense supply pressure and two tosense the output pressures.

Primary MasterMasters are communicating devices. A primarymaster is a communicating device permanentlywired to a field instrument. Typically, aHART-compatible control system or a computerrunning AMS ValveLink Software is the primarymaster.

In contrast, a secondary master is not oftenpermanently wired to a field instrument. TheModel 375 Field Communicator or a computerrunning ValveLink software communicatingthrough a HART modem could be considered asecondary master.

Note: If one type of master takes an instrumentOut Of Service, the same type must put it InService. For example, if a device set up as aprimary master takes an instrument Out OfService, a device set up as a primary mastermust be used to place the instrument In Service.

12Glossary

Glossary

May 2007 Glossary-5

Quick OpeningA valve flow characteristic where most of thechange in flow rate takes place for small amountsof stem travel from the closed position. The flowcharacteristic curve is basically linear through thefirst 40 percent of stem travel. One of the inputcharacteristics available for a FIELDVUE digitalvalve controller. See also, Equal Percentage andLinear.

Random Access Memory (RAM)A type of semiconductor memory that is normallyused by the microprocessor during normaloperation that permits rapid retrieval and storageof programs and data. See also Read OnlyMemory (ROM) and Non-Volatile Memory (NVM).

RateAmount of change in output proportional to therate of change in input.

Read-Only Memory (ROM)A memory in which information is stored at thetime of instrument manufacture. You canexamine but not change ROM contents.

Seat LoadForce exerted on the valve seat, typicallyexpressed in pounds force per lineal inch of portcircumference. Seat load is determined by shutoffrequirements.

Set Point Filter TimeThe time constant, in seconds, for the first-orderinput filter.

SoftwareMicroprocessor or computer programs androutines that reside in alterable memory (usuallyRAM), as opposed to firmware, which consists ofprograms and routines that are programmed intomemory (usually ROM) when the instrument ismanufactured. Software can be manipulatedduring normal operation, firmware cannot.

Stroking TimeThe time, in seconds, required to move the valvefrom its fully open position to fully closed, or viceversa.

Temperature SensorA device within the FIELDVUE instrument thatmeasures the instrument�s internal temperature.

TravelMovement of the valve stem or shaft whichchanges the amount the valve is open or closed.

Travel AccumulatorThe capability of a FIELDVUE instrument torecord total change in travel. The value of theTravel Accumulator increments when themagnitude of the change exceeds the TravelAccumulator Deadband. To reset the TravelAccumulator, set it to zero.

Travel Accumulator AlertChecks the difference between the TravelAccumulator value and the Travel AccumulatorAlert Point. The Travel Accumulator Alert is activewhen the Travel Accumulator value exceeds theTravel Accumulator Alert Point. It clears after youreset the Travel Accumulator to a value less thanthe alert point.

Travel Accumulator Alert PointAn adjustable value which, when exceeded,activates the Travel Accumulator Alert. Validentries are 0% to 4 billion %.

Travel Accumulator DeadbandRegion around the travel reference pointestablished at the last increment of theaccumulator. This region must be exceededbefore a change in travel can be accumulated.Valid entries are 0% to 100%.

Travel AlertChecks the ranged travel against the travel highand low alert points. The travel alert is active ifeither the high or low point is exceeded. Once ahigh or low point is exceeded, the ranged travelmust clear that point by the Travel AlertDeadband before the alert clears. Four travelalerts are available: Travel Alert Hi, Travel AlertLo, Travel Alert Hi Hi, and Travel Alert Lo Lo.

Travel Alert DeadbandTravel, in percent of ranged travel, required toclear a travel alert, once it is active. Valid entriesare −25% to 125%.

12Glossary

DVC6000 SIS

May 2007Glossary-6

Travel Alert High PointValue of the travel, in percent of ranged travel,which, when exceeded, sets the Travel Alert Hialert. Valid entries are −25% to 125%.

Travel Alert High High PointValue of the travel, in percent of ranged travel,which, when exceeded, sets the Travel Alert Hi Hialert. Valid entries are −25% to 125%.

Travel Alert Low PointValue of the travel, in percent of ranged travel,which, when exceeded, sets the Travel Alert Loalert. Valid entries are −25% to 125%.

Travel Alert Low Low PointValue of the travel, in percent of ranged travel,which, when exceeded, sets the Travel Alert LoLo alert. Valid entries are −25% to 125%.

Travel CutoffDefines the cutoff point for the travel, in percentof ranged travel. There are two travel cutoffs:high and low. Once travel exceeds the cutoff, thedrive signal is set to either maximum or minimum,depending on the aero power condition and if thecutoff is high or low. Minimum opening time orminimum closing time are not in effect while thetravel is beyond the cutoff. Use the travel cutoff toobtain the desired seat load or to be sure thevalve is fully open.

Travel DeviationThe difference between the analog input signal (inpercent of ranged input), the �target� travel, andthe actual �ranged� travel.

Travel Deviation AlertChecks the difference between the target and theranged travel. If the difference exceeds the TravelDeviation Alert Point for more than the TravelDeviation Time, the Travel Deviation Alert isactive. It remains active until the difference is lessthan the Travel Deviation Alert Point.

Travel Deviation Alert PointAn adjustable value for the target travel and theranged travel difference, expressed in percent,When this value is exceeded by the traveldeviation for more than the Travel DeviationTime, the Travel Deviation Alert is active. Validentries are 0% to 100%. Typically this is set to5%.

Travel Deviation TimeThe time, in seconds. that the travel deviationmust exceed the Travel Deviation Alert Pointbefore the alert is active. Valid entries are 1 to 60seconds.

Travel LimitA setup parameter that defines the maximumallowable travel (in percent of ranged travel) forthe valve. During operation, the travel target willnot exceed this limit. There are two travel limits:high and low. Typically the travel limit low will beused to keep the valve from going completelyclosed.

Travel RangeTravel, in percent of calibrated travel, thatcorresponds to the input range.

Travel SensorA device within the FIELDVUE instrument thatsenses valve stem or shaft movement. The travelsensor is mechanically connected to the valvestem or shaft.

Travel Sensor MotionEstablishes motion of the travel sensor. Whileviewing the end of the travel sensor shaft, ifincreasing air pressure to the actuator causes theshaft to rotate clockwise, travel sensor motion isCW. If increasing air pressure causes the shaft torotate counterclockwise, travel sensor motion isCCW.

TuningThe adjustment of control terms or parametervalues to produce a desired control effect.

Tuning SetPreset values that identify gain settings for aFIELDVUE instrument. The tuning set and supplypressure together determine an instrument�sresponse to input signal changes.

12Glossary

Glossary

May 2007 Glossary-7

Watch Dog TimerA timer that the microprocessor must rearmperiodically. If the microprocessor is unable torearm the timer, the instrument goes throughreset.

Zero Power ConditionThe position of the valve when the power to thepositioner is turned off. It is used to reference 0%travel. For Relay A and C, Port A will be atatmosphere pressure, and if double-acting, Port Bwill be at supply pressure. For Relay B, Port Bwill be at supply pressure.

12Glossary

DVC6000 SIS

May 2007Glossary-8

12Glossary

Index

May 2007 Index-1

AActuator Style, 5-22

adjustment arm, 2-6

Alert Conditions, 7-3Alert Record, 7-4Electronics, 7-3Environment, 7-4Sensor, 7-3SIS, 7-4Travel, 7-4Travel History, 7-4

Alert Groups, 5-18Failure Alerts, 5-19Miscellaneous, 5-19Valve Alerts, 5-19

Alert Record, 5-18

Alerts, 5-14Alert Record, 5-18

Alert Groups, 5-18Enabling Alert Groups, 5-18

Electronic, 5-15Drive Signal Alert, 5-15Processor Impaired Alerts, 5-15

Environment, 5-15Environmental

Aux Terminal Alerts, 5-15Supply Press Lo Alert, 5-16

Sensor, 5-15SIS, 5-18Travel, 5-16

Deviation Alert, 5-16Limit Alerts, 5-16Travel Limit Cutoff Alerts, 5-17Travel Limit Hi/Lo Alerts, 5-16

Travel History, 5-17Cycle Count, 5-17Cycle Count/Tvl Accum Deadband, 5-17Tvl Accum, 5-17

Analog Calibration Adjust, 6-4

Analog InputDisplaying Value, 7-9Units, 5-20

Analog Input Calibration, 6-10

Analog Input Range, 5-20

ASCO Solenoid Valve, 2-21

ATEXNameplates, 11-4Special Conditions for Safe Use, 2-3, 2-4

Auto Calibrate Travel, 6-3Error Messages, 6-4

Auto Test Interval , 5-24

Aux Term Mode , 5-21

Auxiliary Input, Displaying Status, 7-9

Auxiliary Terminal, 7-6Local DI, 7-6Wiring Length Guidelines, 7-6

auxiliary terminal button, 5-12

Bbias spring, 2-6

Burst Mode, 5-5Commands, 5-5Enabling, 5-5

CCalibration

Analog Input, 6-10Auto Calibrate Travel, 6-3

Error Messages, 6-4Manual Calibrate Travel, 6-4Pressure Sensors, 6-6PST, 6-12Relay Adjustment, 6-10Sensor Calibration, 6-6

Pressure Sensors, 6-6Travel

Auto, 6-3Manual, 6-4

Analog Calibration Adjust, 6-4Digital Calibration Adjust, 6-5

Travel Sensor, 6-7Travel Sensor Adjust, 6-7

Calibration , Travel, 6-2

Calibration & Diagnostics, 5-19

Calibration Status and Location, 5-21

Communication Cable Capacitance, 2-18

Communication Connections, 2-16

ConnectionsElectrical

4 to 20 mA Loop, 2-15Communication, 2-16Test, 2-16

PneumaticOutput, 2-13

Index

DVC6000 SIS

May 2007Index-2

Supply, 2-12Pressure, 2-12Vent, 2-14

Control Mode, 5-4

Control System RequirementsCompliance Voltage, 2-18Voltage Available, 2-17

CSALoop Schematics, DVC6000 andDVC6000S, 11-2

Nameplates, 11-2Special Conditions of Safe Use, 2-3

Cycle Count, 5-17

Cycle CounterDisplaying Value, 7-9Enabling Alert, 5-17Resetting, 5-17

DDate, 5-20, 5-21

DD Information, 7-10

Declaration of SEP, 1-5

Define Custom Characteristic, 5-14

Demand Mode Tests, 7-7Point-to-Point Mode, 7-7when LCP100 is used, 7-8

Description, DVC6000 Series, 1-3

Descriptor, 5-20

Detailed Setup, 5-4

Device Information, 7-10

Device Record, 7-5

Device Revision, 7-10

Device Variables, 7-9

Digital Calibration Adjust, 6-5

DIP Switch, 2-20Setting, 9-8

Drive Signal, Displaying Value, 7-9

DVC Power Up, 5-24

DVC6000 Series, Principle of Operation, 8-2

Dynamic Response, 5-14

EEducational Services, 1-7

EF8316G303, ASCO solenoid valve, 2-21

EF8316G304, ASCO solenoid valve, 2-21

Electromagnetic Interference, 1-4

Emergency Mode Tests, Multidrop Mode, 7-7

End Point Pressure Control, 5-13

End Point Pressure Deviation, 7-4

Error Messages, Auto Calibrate Travel, 6-4

FFactory Settings, Restoring, 6-11

Feedback Connection, 5-22

Field CommunicatorDevice Description Revision, 3-6Display, 3-2Hot Key, 3-4Offline Menu, 3-4Online Menu, 3-6Online Simulation, 3-5Polling, 3-5Soft Input Panel Keyboard (SIP), 3-3Specifications, 3-2System Information, 3-5Using the Keypad, 3-2

filter, 40 micron, 2-13

Firmware Revision, 7-10

FMLoop Schematics, DVC6000 andDVC6000S, 11-3

Nameplates, 11-3Special Conditions of Safe Use, 2-3

follower arm extension, 2-8

Free Time, Self Test Failure, enabling tocause instrument shutdown, 5-15

GGauges, Tire Valves, & Pipe Plugs

Parts List, 10-4Replacing, 9-9

HHardware Revision, 7-10

Index

Index

May 2007 Index-3

HART Communication, Principle of Operation,8-2

HART Tag, 5-19

Hazardous Area Approvals, 2-3

Hot Key, Field Communicator, 3-4

Humidity Limits, 1-4

II/P Converter

Parts List, 10-4Removing, 9-7Replacing, 9-7Replacing Filter, 9-6

IEC 61010 Compliance Requirements, 1-5

IEC 61326-1 (Edition 1.1), 1-4

IECExConditions of Certification, 2-4Nameplates, 11-5

Independent Linearity, 1-4

Initial Setup, 4-2

Input Characterization, 5-13

Input Range, 5-20

Input SignalMulti-drop, 1-4Point-to-Point, 1-4

Installation2-Wire System, 2-204-Wire System, 2-20LCP100 (Local Control Panel), 2-24

Instrument Clock, Setting, 5-19

Instrument Date and Time, 5-21

Instrument Level, 7-10

Instrument Mode, 4-2, 5-4

Instrument Serial Number, 5-20

Instrument Status, 7-4Viewing, 7-4

Integral Action, Enable Integral Settings, 5-7

Integral Dead Zone, 5-19

Integral Limit, 5-7

Integral Settings, 5-7

Internal Temperature, Displaying Value, 7-9

LLag Time, 5-14

LCP100 Local Control Panel, Installation, 2-24

Line Conditioner, Part Number, 10-5

Line conditioner, 2-21

Locked in Safety Alert, 7-4

Loop Connections, 4 to 20 mA , 2-15

Loop Schematics, DVC6000 and DVC6000SCSA, 11-2FM, 11-3

MManual Calibrate Travel, 6-4

Manual Conventions, 1-2

Manual Reset, 7-7

Manufacturer, 5-21

Max Travel Movement, 5-22

Maximum Supply Pressure, 5-21

maximum supply pressure, 5-21

Message, 5-20

Module BaseRemoval, 9-5Replacing, 9-6

Module Base, Parts List, 10-4

Module Base Maintenance, 9-5

Mounting, 1-5, 2-567CFR, 2-11DVC6010, 2-5DVC6020, 2-7DVC6030, 2-9

NNameplates

ATEXFlameproof, Dust-Tight, 11-4Intrinsic Safety, Dust-Tight, 11-4Type n, Dust-Tight, 11-4

CSA, 11-2FM, 11-3IECEx, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Flameproof,11-5

NEPSI, Intrinsic Safety, Flameproof, Dust,11-5

Index

DVC6000 SIS

May 2007Index-4

NEPSINameplates, 11-5Notes for Safe Use of the Certified Product, 2-4

Number of Power Ups, Displaying Status,7-10

OOutput Connections, 2-13

Double-Acting Actuators, 2-13

Output Pressure, Displaying Value, 7-9

Output Signal, 1-4

PParameters, Factory Default, Detailed Setup,5-4

Partial Stroke Test, 7-5Configuring

Partial Stroke Pressure Limit, 5-22Pause Time, 5-22Stroke Speed, 5-22

InitiatingAuxiliary Terminal, 7-6

Local Control Panel, 7-6Local Push Button, 7-6

Device (Digital Valve Controller), 7-5Model 375 Field Communicator, 7-7

initiating, 7-5

Partial Stroke Test (PST), 7-4

PartsCommon Parts, 10-3Feedback Parts, 10-5Gauges, Tire Valves, & Pipe Plugs, 10-4I/P Converter Assembly, 10-4Kits, 10-2Module Base, 10-4Ordering, 10-2Printed Wiring Board Assembly, 10-4Relay, 10-4Terminal Box, 10-4

Pause Time, 5-22

Performance Tuner, 4-5, 5-7

Pneumatic RelayAdjusting, 6-10Parts List, 10-4Removing, 9-8

Replacing, 9-9

Polling Address, 5-20

Pressure Connections, 2-12

Pressure Sensor Calibration, 6-6

Pressure Set Point, 5-13Setting manually, 5-13

Pressure Tuning Sets, Gain Values, 5-11

Pressure Units, 5-20

Principle of Operation, DVC6000, 8-2

Printed Wiring Board AssemblyParts List, 10-4Removing, 9-7Replacing, 9-8Setting DIP Switch, 9-8Setting DIP Switch, 2-20

Protection, 4-2, 5-6

PST Calibration, 6-12

PST Press Limitdouble acting actuators, 5-22single acting actuators, 5-22

RRaw Travel Input, Displaying Status, 7-10

Related Documents, 1-3

RelayDouble-Acting, 6-10Single-Acting Direct, 6-11Single-Acting Reverse, 6-11

Relay A, 6-10

Relay Adjustment, 6-10Double-Acting, 6-10

Relay B, 6-11

Relay C, 6-11

Relay Type, 5-20

reset, 5-11

Restart Control Mode, 5-5

Revision InformationDVC6000

Device, 7-10Firmware, 7-10Hardware, 7-10HART Universal, 7-10

Field Communicator, Device Description,3-6

Index

Index

May 2007 Index-5

Run Time, Displaying Status, 7-10

SSafety Instrumented System, Installation, 2-20

2-Wire System, 2-204-Wire System, 2-20LCP100 (Local Control Panel) Installation,2-24

Serial NumberInstrument, 5-20Valve, 5-20, 5-21

Set Point Rate Close, 5-14

Set Point Rate Open, 5-14

Setup Wizard, 4-3

Shaft Rotation, 1-5

Single-Acting Actuators, 2-13

SISPressure Mode Enable, 5-13Valve Stuck Alert, 5-25

SIS Alerts, 5-18

SIS Panel Comm Error, 7-4

Solenoid Valve, Health Monitoring, 2-14, 7-8

special application, 2-14

Special Instructions for Safe Use andInstallations in Hazardous Locations, 2-3

ATEX Flameproof, Dust, 2-3ATEX Intrinsic Safety, Dust, 2-3ATEX Type n, Dust, 2-4CSA, 2-3FM, 2-3IECEx Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Flameproof,2-4

NEPSI, 2-4

Specifications, DVC6000 Series, 1-3

Stabilize/Optimize, 5-7

Status, 5-19Calibration & Diagnostics, 5-19Instrument Time, 5-19Integrator, 5-19Operational, 5-19

Steady-State Air Consumption, 1-4

Stem Travel, 1-5

Stroke Speed, 5-22

Stroke Valve, 7-5

Stroking the Output, with Field Communicator,7-5

Supply Connections, 2-12

Supply Pressure, 1-4Displaying Value, 7-9

TTemperature

Maximum Recorded, Displaying Value, 7-9Minimum Recorded, Displaying Value, 7-9Units, 5-20

Temperature Limits, Operating Ambient, 1-4

Terminal BoxParts List, 10-4Removing, 9-9Replacing, 9-10

Test Connections, 2-16

Third-Party Approvals, 2-3

Tier Capabilities, 1-2

Travel, Displaying Value, 7-9

Travel / Pressure Control, 5-12Cutoffs, 5-12End Point Pressure Control, 5-13

Travel Accumulation Alert Enable, 5-17

Travel AccumulatorDisplaying Value, 7-9Enabling Alert, 5-17Resetting, 5-18

Travel Accumulator Alerts, 5-17

Travel Cutoff Alerts, 5-17

Travel Cutoffs, Adjustable, 5-12

Travel Deviation Alert, 5-16

Travel History Alerts, 5-17

travel indicator assembly, 2-10

Travel SensorAdjusting

DVC6010, 6-7DVC6020, 6-8DVC6030, 6-7

Parts List, 10-5Removing

DVC6010, 9-10DVC6020, 9-11DVC6030, 9-11

ReplacingDVC6010, 9-11

IndexIndex

DVC6000 SIS

May 2007Index-6

DVC6020, 9-12DVC6030, 9-13

Travel Sensor Adjust, 6-7

Travel Sensor Motion, 5-22

Travel Target, Displaying Value, 7-9

Travel Tuning Sets, Gain Values, 5-6

Troubleshooting, 9-2

Tuning, 5-6Pressure, 5-10Travel, 5-6

Tuning SetsPressure, 5-10

Gain Values, 5-11Travel, 5-6

Gain Values, 5-6

TÜV Certification, 1-3

VValve Serial Number, 5-20, 5-21

Valve Style, 5-22

Variables, Device, 7-9

Vent, 2-14

Voltage AvailableCalculating, 2-17Checking, 9-4

WWeight, Valve-Mounted Instruments, 1-5

Wiring Length Guidelines, Auxiliary Terminal ,7-6

Wiring PracticesCommunication Cable Capacitance, 2-18Control System Requirements, 2-17

Compliance Voltage, 2-18Voltage Available, 2-17

ZZero Power Condition, 5-21

Index

Emerson Process ManagementMarshalltown, Iowa 50158 USACernay 68700 France Sao Paulo 05424 BrazilSingapore 128461

www.Fisher.com

The contents of this publication are presented for informational purposes only, and while every effort has been made to ensure their accuracy, theyare not to be construed as warranties or guarantees, express or implied, regarding the products or services described herein or their use or applicability. We reserve the right to modify or improve the designs or specifications of such products at any time without notice.

Neither Emerson, Emerson Process Management, nor any of their affiliated entities assumes responsibility for the selection, use and maintenance of any product. Responsibility for the selection, use and maintenance of any product remains with the purchaser and end-user.

Fisher Controls International LLC 2007; All Rights Reserved Printed in USA

FIELDVUE, ValveLink, PlantWeb and Fisher are marks owned by Fisher Controls International LLC, a member of the Emerson Process Management business division of Emerson Electric Co. Emerson and the Emerson logo are trademarks and service marks of Emerson ElectricCo. AMS is a mark owned by one of the Emerson Process Management group of companies. ASCO is a mark owned by one of the Emerson Industrial Automation group of companies. HART is a mark owned by the HART Comunication Foundation. All other marks are the property oftheir respective owners. This product may be covered under one or more of the following patents (5,163, 463; 5,265,637; 5,381,817; 5,434,774;5,439,021; 5,451,923; 5,502,999; 5,532,925; 5,533,544; 5,549,137; 5,558,115; 5,573,032; 5,687,098) or under pending patents.

DVC6000SIS

Documents

Transcript of DVC6000SIS